JP2023115155A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing game amusement.SOLUTION: After performing a betting operation, a slot machine 10 starts rotating each of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the basis of the operation of a start lever 41. Then, by operating stop switches 42 to 44, the corresponding reels are stopped, and a stop combination according to the lottery result may be acquired. In accordance with the lottery result of each game, a shift lottery to an advantageous section may be performed, and at that time, a continuous performance may occur on an auxiliary display unit 65. In the continuous performance in which the shift lottery to the advantageous section is won, it is possible to accept the operation of a first selection switch 87 and the operation of a second selection switch 88 for predicting the notification of the result of the continuous performance.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines, slot machines, and the like are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, it is known that an internal lottery is held based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition, and a privilege is given to the player according to the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, regarding the slot machine, when the start lever is operated in a situation where medals as game media are betted, an internal lottery is carried out and the reels start to rotate and stop while the reels are rotating. When the switch is operated, the rotation of the reels stops. Then, when the result of stopping the reels corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game in the above-exemplified gaming machines, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a game.

The present invention
A gaming machine in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation,
grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant the first specific benefit to the player based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined determination trigger different from the result of the game;
The first specific privilege may be granted to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a first result corresponding to granting the first specific privilege to the player. On the other hand, based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a second result that does not correspond to granting the first specific privilege to the player, the first specified privilege is given to the player. a first specific benefit granting means for not granting
After executing a predetermined effect based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first result effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the first result, and the result of the grant determination a second result effect corresponding to the second result, and a specific effect of performing any one of a plurality of result effects, including a specified effect, to be performed by a predetermined effect means. a means of execution;
In a situation where the specific effect is performed by the specific effect execution means and before the result effect in the specific effect is performed, a predetermined first specific operation and a second specific operation different from the first specific operation are performed. an operation receiving means capable of receiving an operation of a specific operation;
characterized by comprising

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine in one embodiment; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is closed; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a slot machine showing a state in which a front door is opened; FIG. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing|casing. It is a figure which shows the pattern arrangement|sequence of each reel. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a pattern that can be visually recognized through a display window and an effective line; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the privilege to be given; 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing by a main control unit. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by a main controller; It is a flow chart which shows lottery processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. 4 is a flowchart showing reel control processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control; 4 is a flowchart showing RT state processing; It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 3rd RT states. 10 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing; It is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the order of operation of the stop switch and the winning mode to be established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition relationship of each state; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of display modes; It is a flow chart which shows lottery result correspondence processing. It is a flow chart which shows advantageous section transition lottery processing. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a first special winning combination process; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a second special combination process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows processing for addition information. 13 is a flow chart showing a third special combination process; 4 is a flow chart showing processing for a specialized zone; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining main results of a lottery related to an instruction function and setting differences between winning probabilities; It is a figure which shows an example of an advantageous area transition lottery table and an AT mode transition lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a portent game number table; It is a figure which shows an example of an addition lottery table and an addition game number lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the number of remaining games in the actual advantageous section and the number of remaining games on the display; It is a figure which shows an example of a back-up lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition alerting|reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode change alerting|reporting. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of the pressing order notification effect performed on the auxiliary display section; It is a flow chart which shows pushing process. It is a flowchart which shows a prize-winning result corresponding process. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing game number management processing; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing end determination processing; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of an instruction|indication monitor and an area indicator. It is a flow chart which shows section display 1st processing. It is a flow chart which shows section display 2nd processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining game number management processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing remaining number management processing; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous section and the display of the section indicator; 10 is a flowchart showing effect setting processing by a sub-side display control device; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a betting effect setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a production|presentation setting process at the time of a start. 10 is a flow chart showing a process for notification of pressing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting process at the time of all stop. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production|presentation setting process. 10 is a flowchart showing operation corresponding processing; It is a figure which shows the relationship between an alerting|reporting timing and an additional effect. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure for demonstrating the outline|summary of continuous production|presentation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure which shows the selection rate of each option in continuous production|presentation. It is a figure for demonstrating the difference of a victory expectation. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure for demonstrating the point given at the time of a correct answer. 9 is a flowchart showing selection handling processing; It is a flow chart which shows point corresponding processing. 10 is a flow chart showing a setting process of bonus end effects. It is a figure which shows an example of a special end effect table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition trigger role and the selection rate of the enemy character; FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition trigger and the weapon selection rate; FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the transition opportunity and the selection rate of the number of attacks; 10 is a flowchart showing point correspondence processing in Modification 1. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a selection handling process, and (b) is a diagram showing the number of additions to points given for correct answers when carried over. 14 is a flow chart showing a setting process of an operation-responsive effect in Modified Example 2. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of display effect by an auxiliary display unit; It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation table corresponding to operation. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of points given for correct answer according to a transition trigger role in Modification 3. FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of points given for a correct answer according to a transition opportunity. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of points given for a correct answer according to a transition opportunity. 16 is a flowchart showing a continuous effect setting process in Modification 4. FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a reselection process, (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by the auxiliary display unit. 10A is a flowchart showing part of a selection handling process, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of a display effect by an auxiliary display unit in Modified Example 5. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a part of continuous effect setting processing in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of a calculation point table. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing setting processing for an operation-responsive effect; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a calculation point table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a calculation point table in modification 1; FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a calculation point table in modification 2; 10 is a flowchart showing selection handling processing in the third embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows production adjustment processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of production|presentation adjustment. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of production|presentation adjustment. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of production|presentation adjustment. It is a figure which shows an example of the result of production|presentation adjustment. It is a graph for explaining the relationship between the effect adjustment result and the interest of the predictive game.

<First Embodiment>
An embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a reel-type game machine, which is a type of game machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and FIG. 5 is a front view of the housing 11. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 forming its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed in the shape of a box with an open front as a whole, and is attached to a so-called island facility by nailing or the like when it is installed in a game hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so that it can be opened and closed. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side as viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. With the spindles 13a and 13b inserted into the bearings 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates with respect to the housing 11 about the opening/closing axis extending vertically connecting the spindles 13a and 13b. It is movably supported, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by turning the front door 12 . Further, the front door 12 is kept in a locked state by a locking device 20 provided on the back side thereof so that it cannot be opened. A key cylinder 21 integrated with a locking device 20 is provided on the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.例文帳に追加

A game panel 25 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12 to inform the player of the game state. Three vertical display windows 26L, 26M and 26R are formed side by side on the game panel 25, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be visually recognized through the respective display windows 26L, 26M and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one and used as a common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30. Above the partition plate 30, a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is cylindrical (annular). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is rotatably supported such that the center axis thereof coincides with the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R are arranged on the same axis extending substantially horizontally, and the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R one-to-one. . Therefore, part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are displayed through the respective display windows 26L, 26M, 26R as if they were moving from top to bottom.

Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are individually driven by the stepping motor to rotate independently. . The stepping motor is set to make one rotation by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), for example. controlled. Also, in the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The reel index sensor outputs a detection signal to the main controller 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has made one rotation. Therefore, main controller 101 adjusts the angular positions of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R every rotation based on the detection signal from the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be checked and corrected.

A plurality of patterns as identification information are drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R in the long side direction (circling direction). More specifically, 21 patterns are drawn at regular intervals. Therefore, 24 pulses (=504 pulses/21 symbols) of excitation pulses are required to switch a pattern at a predetermined position to the next pattern. Further, the main controller 101 recognizes the symbols that are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, Control can be performed to stop a predetermined pattern at a position visible from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

Next, the symbols drawn on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described.

FIG. 6 shows the pattern arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M and 32R. Numbers 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, respectively. , and are not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, the numbers will be used in the following description.

The symbols include a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 7th on the left reel 32L), a “white bell” symbol (for example, the 20th on the left reel 32L), and a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th on the left reel 32L). 3rd), “second replay” symbol (e.g., 6th on left reel 32L), “red 7” symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), “watermelon” symbol (e.g., 8th on left reel 32L) , “Cherry” symbol (eg, 4th on left reel 32L), “Black BAR” symbol (eg, 18th on left reel 32L), “White BAR” symbol (eg, 17th on left reel 32L), “LUCKY There are 11 types of symbols (for example, the 5th on the left reel 32L) and "young man" symbols (for example, the 0th on the left reel 32L). Then, as shown in FIG. 6, the numbers and arrangement orders of various symbols are completely different in each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that three of the 21 symbols attached to the corresponding reel are visible as a whole. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, 3×3=9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is reported using a combination of three symbols, one symbol for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the visible symbols. Since 3×3=9 symbols are visible as described above, as a combination of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. A combination of symbols stopping on the upper line L1, a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a combination of symbols stopping on the middle line L2 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There is a combination of symbols that stop on the bottom line L3. In addition, combinations of symbols stopped on the right downward line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M. There is a combination of each symbol that stops on a right rising line L5 connecting the upper symbols of the right reel 32R. In addition, there is also a combination of symbols that stop on the bending line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the respective patterns are arranged, and the bending line L6 is a line in which the patterns are bent in the middle when the respective patterns are arranged. Note that there are combinations of symbols other than the bending line L6 that stop on the line where the bending occurs, but the explanation is omitted here.

Among these lines L1 to L6, lines that are activated and lines that are not activated are set according to the number of medals bet. When a prize is established, a privilege of paying out a predetermined number of medals, which are game media, is given, or a privilege of shifting the game state is given. On the other hand, if the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the line that is not activated, winning is not established and the privilege is not awarded.

In the slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 8(a), only the lower right line L4 is the active line, and as shown in FIG. 8(b), two lower lines L3 and lower right line L4 There is a case where the combined line is the valid line and a case where only the bend line L6 is the valid line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are betted and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is the valid line, and when two medals are betted and the game is started, the lower line is the active line. The line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as valid lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward right line L5 are never regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3-bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2-bet game, and a game started with 1 medal is bet. Also known as a one-bet game.

9 to 11 are diagrams showing the correspondence between winning symbol combinations and benefits provided when winning.

As the small winning combination for which medals are paid out, there are the 1st small winning combination to the 41st small winning combination.

The "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are on the effective line. If it stops, the first minor winning combination is won. When the first minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 2nd minor winning prize to the 26th minor winning prize have different winning symbol combinations. "White BAR" pattern, "Red 7" pattern, "Cherry" pattern, "White Bell" pattern or "LUCKY" pattern, right reel 32R "White BAR" pattern, "Youth" pattern, "White Bell" pattern, A "red 7" symbol or a "second replay" symbol stops on the upper line L1, that is, the "bell" symbol of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. For example, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops at the lower stage. If you do, you will win the 8th minor role. As shown in FIG. 6, on the middle reel 32M, a "cherry" symbol (No. 11) and a "red bell" symbol are arranged at a position adjacent to the upstream side (No. 12), and on the right reel 32R, A "red bell" design is arranged at a position (20th) separated by one design upstream from the "white BAR" design (18th). Therefore, when the eighth minor win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the right The "red bell" symbol on the reel 32R is stopped on the upper line L1. When the 2nd minor winning combination to the 26th minor winning combination are established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 27th minor combination is a combination in which whether or not a prize is won is determined by the stop symbol on the left reel 32L as a predetermined reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, "Cherry" on the left reel 32L. The 27th minor winning prize is established when the symbol stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. In this case, the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning determination. In other words, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L is up or stopped. By stopping, the 27th minor winning combination is established. When the 27th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 28th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the "cherry" symbols on the left reel 32L stop at the upper or lower stage, and the "cherry" symbols stop together on the lower right line L4. More specifically, "cherry" symbols or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols, "white bell" symbols or "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "cherry" symbols on the right reel 32R, When the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops, the 28th minor winning combination is won. When the 28th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

As a supplementary explanation of the relationship between the 27th small winning combination and the 28th small winning combination, when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol on the left reel 32L stops, regardless of the stopped symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, Although the 27th minor winning combination is established, depending on the stop symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 28th minor winning combination may be established instead of the 27th minor winning combination. That is, although the winning mode of winning the 27th minor role includes the winning mode of winning the 28th minor role, the 27th minor role winning and the 28th minor role winning are clearly distinguished and determined. is done.

The 29th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which a "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, a "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line. In other words, when the downward-sloping line L4 is the valid line, the 29th minor winning combination is established by stopping all the "watermelon" symbols downward-sloping. When the 29th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

The 30th minor winning combination is a winning mode in which the left reel 32L "watermelon" symbol, the middle reel 32M "watermelon" symbol, and the right reel 32R "watermelon" symbol stop on the upper line L1. More specifically, when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the activated line, the 30th small Awarded for role. When the 30th minor win is established, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Black BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" symbol or "white" symbol on the right reel 32R When the "bell" symbol and stop on the active line, the 31st minor winning combination is won. When the 31st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th minor wins, 3 medals are paid out in the case of a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 36th small winning prize is obtained when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the "watermelon" symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M, or the left reel 32L. , the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the activated line, while the "watermelon" symbol on the remaining reels does not stop on the activated line. When the 36th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"Red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "black BAR", "watermelon", and "cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and "red bell" and "white" symbols on the right reel 32R. When the "bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol stop on the active line, the 37th small win is won. As shown in FIG. 6, on the left reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol (No. 7) and a "second replay" symbol are arranged at a downstream adjacent position (No. 6). "Bell" symbols (3rd, 12th, 15th, 20th) and "1st Replay" symbols are arranged at adjacent positions (2nd, 11th, 14th, 19th) on the downstream side. On the right reel 32R, the main "red bell" symbols (2nd, 5th, 12th, 20th) and adjacent positions (3rd, 6th, 16th, 0th) on the upstream side are "1st A "replay" pattern or a "second replay" pattern is arranged, and a "first replay" pattern is arranged at a position (11th) adjacent to the "white bell" pattern (10th) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 37th minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4, mainly the "Bell" symbol and the "Replay" symbol are tense on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the middle reel 32M is displayed. "Bell" symbols and "Replay" symbols do not stop, which is a so-called double-tenpai-out stop result. When the 37th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

"White BAR" symbol, "young man" symbol, "watermelon" symbol, "first replay" symbol on the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R, When the "watermelon" symbol and the "black BAR" symbol stop on the activated line, the 38th small winning combination is won. In the 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper and lower stages, if the 38th minor winning combination is established, the left A "red bell" symbol on the reel 32L, a "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and a "red bell" symbol or a "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 38th minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “black BAR” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 39th minor role. The 39th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 39th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, Won the 40th minor role. The 40th minor winning combination is a winning mode that is established only in a 3-bet game. When the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the effective line, the 41st small Awarded for role. When the 41st minor win is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

Winnings to which the privilege of replaying that the next game can be played without inserting medals are provided include first to twelfth replaying winnings. Further, when the second re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the second RT state and the fourth re-game. When the winning or the fifth replay winning is established, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, when the 11th re-game win or the 12th re-game win is established, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state.

The state transition winning prizes in which only the transition of the game state is performed include the first BB winning prize, the second BB winning prize, and the CB winning prize.

When the "red 7" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on the active line, the first BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the first BB state. Further, when the "white BAR" symbols of the respective reels 32L, 32M, 32R stop on the activated line, the second BB prize is won, and the game state shifts to the second BB state. "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols, and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. When the CB winning is established, the game state shifts to the CB state.

In addition, although different from winning, there is a stop outcome in which the game state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" pattern or a "white bell" pattern, and the middle reel 32M has a "white BAR" pattern, a "LUCKY" pattern, a "red 7" pattern, a "white bell" pattern, and a "white bell" pattern. When the "cherry" symbol, the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R, and the "first replay" symbol stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the left reel 32L has a "red bell" or "white bell" design, the middle reel 32M has a "red bell" design, and the right reel 32R has a "white BAR" design, a "young man" design, and a "white bell" design. , “red 7” symbols, and “second replay” symbols stop on the active line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of each symbol is referred to as a transition roll.

A start lever 41 that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25. As shown in FIG. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotating the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R start rotating.

On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 are provided to be operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is arranged directly below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a-44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42-44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a-44a are connected to a main controller 101, which will be described later. Based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop switches 42-44 have been operated. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the detection signals of LOW signals are output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44, The detection signal is switched from a LOW signal to a HI signal. The main controller 101 grasps the switching of such signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. When the main controller 101 recognizes that one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, it controls to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops rotating, and when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops rotating, and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R stops. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

A medal slot 45 for inserting medals is provided on the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. The medal slot 45 constitutes input means for inputting game media. Further, if attention is paid to the fact that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting medals by the player, it can be said that the medal insertion slot 45 constitutes direct input means for directly inputting game media.

A medal inserted from the medal slot 45 is led to either a storage passage 47 or an ejection passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12 . More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a. When the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is de-energized, medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, medals are guided. is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11 . On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to the medal receiving tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the front lower portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 for storing medals and a payout device 53 for paying out the medals to the player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotary plate (not shown) to discharge the medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medals to the medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, on the right side of the hopper device 51, a spare tank 54 is provided for avoiding a predetermined amount or more of medals from being stored in the storage tank 52. FIG. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when the medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank .

A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45 . When the return switch 55 is operated under the condition that the medals inserted into the medal slot 45 are clogged in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically interlocked and operated, and the medals clogged in the selector 46 are returned to the medals. It is designed to be returned from the discharge port 49 .

A first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time is provided on the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56 , and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56 . The second credit insert switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insert switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at once. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitute input means for inputting game media together with the medal insertion port 45 . Also, it should be noted that while the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by the operation of directly inserting medals by the player, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are accompanied by the operation of inserting virtual medals based on stored memory. For example, it can be said that it constitutes an indirect input means for indirectly inputting a game medium.

Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 is provided which is operated when the effect occurs. That is, a first credit input switch 56 and a third credit input switch 58 are provided to the left of the effect switch 66, and a second credit input switch 57 is provided to the right of the effect switch 66. there is

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41 . That is, the slot machine 10 has a credit function of storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the condition in which the virtual medals are stored, the virtual medals are dispensed from the medal discharge port 49 as real medals. In this case, focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, it can be said that the settlement switch 59 constitutes settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display portion 60 for displaying the number of credited virtual medals and a remaining number of payouts for displaying the number of remaining medals to be paid out until the BB state ends. A display section 61 and a payout number display section 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display units 60 to 62 are composed of 7-segment displays, it is of course possible to replace them with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display part 62, there is a push order indicator for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and an operation order indicator. An instruction monitor 68 is provided with an interval indicator for indicating an advantageous interval, which is an interval in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of the minor combination. Instruction monitor 68 will be described in greater detail below.

At the top of the front door 12, an upper lamp 63 that lights up or blinks as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right lamps that emit various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game state. A speaker 64 and an auxiliary display section 65 for giving various information to the player are provided. The auxiliary display section 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses. It is called an auxiliary display section 65 . An upper lamp 63 , a speaker 64 , and a display control device 81 for driving the auxiliary display section 65 are provided behind the auxiliary display section 65 .

On the front door 12, below the game panel 25 and below the stop switches 42 to 44, there is provided a lower display section 69 on which the model name of the game machine is written and which constitutes a predetermined display screen. there is In the lower display portion 69, a first selection switch 87 and a second selection switch 88 are arranged side by side on the left and right as a type of operation means for effect. The first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 are arranged at an initial position, which is a position protruding toward the front side of the gaming machine from the front surface of the lower display section 69, and at the rear side of the gaming machine. 87 and the front surface of the second selection switch 88 and the front surface of the lower display portion 69 are displaceable between operation positions in which the front surfaces are substantially flush with each other. The first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 are urged by a predetermined urging means (such as a spring) from the operating position toward the initial position, and the player pushes the switch backward. , it is displaced from the initial position to the operating position, and the rearward pressing force is no longer applied, thereby displacing from the operating position to the initial position.

The effect switch 66 is displaceable between an initial position arranged upward and an operating position arranged downward, and is moved from the operating position to the initial position by a predetermined biasing means (such as a spring). urged toward. Therefore, the performance switch 66 is displaced from the initial position to the operating position when the player performs a downward pressing operation, and is displaced from the operating position to the initial position when the downward pressing force is no longer applied. . That is, the first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 and the effect switch 66 are different not only in their installation positions but also in their operating directions.

Regarding the installation positions of the first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88, more specifically, the first selection switch 87 is arranged at the left end of the lower display section 69, and the second selection switch 88 is arranged at the right end of the lower display section 69. are arranged, and both selection switches 87 and 88 are arranged apart from each other to the left and right. Further, the first selection switch 87 is arranged to the left of the left stop switch 42 and the second selection switch 88 is arranged to the right of the right stop switch 44 . Therefore, for example, an erroneous operation such as touching the first selection switch 87 while trying to operate the second selection switch 88, or touching the second selection switch 88 while trying to operate the first selection switch 87, The occurrence of an erroneous operation in which the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is touched while trying to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 is suppressed.

A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11 . The power supply box 70 accommodates the power supply device 91 therein, and is provided with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101 . The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting the error state of the slot machine 10 . The setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hall manager or the like to adjust the payout of medals. In other words, the winning probability (set value) of the slot machine 10 can be set by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it on by the hall manager or the like. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting the error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10 .

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 for overall management of the game is attached to the housing 11. As shown in FIG.

The main controller 101 is provided with a role ratio monitor 77 for clearly indicating the ratio between the game state that is advantageous to the player and the state that is not. The role ratio monitor 77 is configured to be visible from the front of the gaming machine by opening the front door 12 and to be invisible from the front of the gaming machine by closing the front door 12. 101 is installed on the side facing the front of the game machine. Contained. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in the closed state, the role ratio monitor 77 cannot be visually recognized even through the gaps between the display windows 26L to 26R. The role ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the front door 12 is opened. Note that the role ratio monitor 77 will be described later in detail.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described with reference to block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13. FIG.

The main control unit 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 102 as arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main controller 101 functions as a main board built into the slot machine 10 .

On the input side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects the operation of the start lever 41. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a for individually detecting the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a for detecting medals inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal dispensed from the hopper device 51. A payout detection sensor 51a, a first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and a third credit. A third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key insertion hole 73. Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73a for detecting that a setting key has been inserted and turned on are connected. It's becoming

A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input/output port 104 . The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91a that supplies drive power to each electronic device of the slot machine 10 including the main controller 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power failure state and generates a power failure signal when the power switch 71 shuts off the power as well as when the power fails. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC output from the power supply unit 91a in this example, and determines that the power supply has been cut off when the drive voltage drops below 10 volts, for example. is configured to output a power failure signal. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal to execute power failure processing, which will be described later. This power failure signal is also supplied to the display control device 81 .

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a driving voltage in a control system such as the main control unit 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time during which the stabilized voltage is output is sufficient for main controller 101 to execute power failure processing.

On the output side of the main controller 101, the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit A display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, an instruction monitor 68, a role ratio monitor 77, a display control device 81, an external centralized terminal board 121 capable of transmitting information to a hall management device (not shown), etc. are input. It is connected via the output port 104 .

The above-described CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 102, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for securing , various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, etc., and a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc., are not shown. Various counters are built in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as storage means, and programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-described ROM 105 as part of the control program.

The RAM 106 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the slot machine 10 is powered off. The RAM 106 includes a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery result of the combination, and stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A backup area is provided in addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing , the state information storage area 106c for storing the game state such as the BB state, and the like.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like (including when the power is cut off by operating the power switch 71; the same shall apply hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power-off based on the information in the backup area. . Writing to the backup area is performed when the power is turned off by power failure processing (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed in the main processing when the power is turned on.

Further, the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b when power is shut off due to power failure or the like. When the power is cut off, the NMI interrupt processing as the power failure flag generation processing is immediately executed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 181 has a ROM 182 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the CPU 181, and a work area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182. A RAM 183 and the like for securing are incorporated.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are connected to the output side. there is Based on various commands input from the main controller 101, the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display section 65 are driven and controlled. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is the main board that supervises and manages the game. In other words, the load on the main board is reduced by providing a sub-board for indirect game-related sounds, lamps, and displays.

The input side of the display control device 81 includes a production switch 66 (more specifically, a production switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the production switch 66), a first selection switch 87 (more specifically, the operation of the first selection switch 87). ), a second selection switch 88 (more specifically, a switch detection sensor for detecting the operation of the second selection switch 88), and the like are connected. The various display units 60 to 62 and 68 may also be driven and controlled by the display control device 81 .

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main controller 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (with a cycle of 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. There is an NMI interrupt process that is started with the input of . Of these processes, processes related to the progress of the game, that is, timer interrupt processes and normal processes performed in the main process will be described below.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main controller 101. The CPU 102 of the main controller 101 generates a timer interrupt every 1.49 msec, for example.

First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process, which will be described later, are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. FIG. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure flag is set. When the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103 to execute power failure processing.

Here, an outline of power failure processing will be described.

When the power supply is interrupted due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in a power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106 .

In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether or not the command transmission has been completed. If the transmission has not been completed, this processing is terminated, the timer interrupt processing is resumed, and the command transmission is terminated. When the command transmission is completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106 . After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, when the power failure is resolved, a RAM judgment value for judging whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal is calculated and stored in the backup area, thereby inhibiting subsequent RAM access. After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Considering the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to, for example, noise, it is confirmed whether or not the power failure signal is being output until entering an infinite loop. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been restored. Therefore, the power failure flag is reset while permitting writing to the RAM 106, and the timer interrupt processing is resumed. If the power failure signal continues to be output, an infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, whether or not the power failure signal is output is checked even under the infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is no longer output, the process proceeds to the main process.

Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, when the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

That is, in step S104, clearing processing of the watchdog timer for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, the CPU 102 performs an interrupt end declaration process to enable the next timer interrupt to be set. In step S106, in order to rotate the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, stepping motor control processing is performed to drive the stepping motors, which are the driving motors for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, payout detection sensor 51a, etc. connected to the input/output port 104 are read, and whether the read result is normal or not. Sensor monitoring processing is performed to monitor whether or not. In step S108, timer calculation processing is performed to subtract the value of each counter or timer. In step S109, counter processing is performed to output to the external centralized terminal board 121 the results of counting the number of bets of medals and the number of payouts.

In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command, which will be described later, to the display control device 81 is performed. In step S111, segment data setting processing for setting segment data to be displayed in the credit display section 60, the remaining payout number display section 61, and the payout number display section 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed to supply the segment data set by the segment data setting processing to each of the display units 60 to 62, 68 and display corresponding numerals, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in step S101 are returned to the corresponding registers in the CPU 102, respectively. After that, in step S115, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Next, normal processing for performing main controls related to the game will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S201, interrupt permission processing for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling the game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the display control device 81 or the like finishes initialization. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and the like is completed, game management processing shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

As game management processing, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, random numbers used in the previous game) are cleared. After that, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any replay winning has been established in the previous game. If any of the replay wins have been established, automatic injection processing for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the number of previous bets is performed, and the start waiting processing is terminated. Specifically, for example, when a replay win is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting 3 virtual medals is performed, and when a replay win is established in a 1-bet game, 1 token is executed. , the virtual medals are automatically inserted.

Note that in the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display section 60 . In other words, if any of the replay wins are established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the replay winnings has been established, sensor abnormality confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring processing step S107 of the timer interrupt processing, When an abnormality occurs, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. Medal return processing for determining whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated when the reading result of the sensor is normal, and paying out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals when the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or credit insertion switches 56 to 58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process. If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets, etc. is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 has been performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached a specified number. In this slot machine 10, "2" is set as the specified number in the CB state, and game states other than the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, the "1" and "3" are set as the prescribed numbers in the 4RT state and BB state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is "2", and in other than the CB state, the bet number is "1" or "3". , an affirmative determination is made in step S205. In other words, in a game state other than the CB state, if no medals have been betted, or if the number of bets is "2" even if medals have been betted, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process among the processes are performed.

When the number of bets has reached the prescribed number, a mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. Such shift notification processing will be described later in detail.

After the processing of step S206 is performed, a bet command including information on the processing result of step S206 and information on the number of bets for which affirmative determination was made in step S205 is sent to the display control device 81 as a sub-side control device. set as the output target of The command set here is output to the display control device 81 at step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the display control device 81 that receives the bet command will be described later in detail.

After executing the processing of step S207, it is determined whether or not the start lever 41 has been operated in step S208. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game is started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that the prescribed number of medals are betted. It means that a command has occurred. In such a case, in step S209, a valid line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as a valid line is performed. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as the active line, and in the 2-bet game, the downward-sloping line L3 and the downward-sloping line L4 are set as the active lines. Also, in the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as the effective line. In step S210, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit acceptance of bets. Thereafter, lottery processing in step S211, reel control processing in step S212, medal payout processing in step S213, RT state processing in step S214, and bonus state processing in step S215 are sequentially executed, and the process returns to step S203.

Next, lottery processing in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S301, a random number used for judging whether a winning combination is right or wrong is acquired. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates a random number from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. FIG. By adopting such a configuration, it becomes possible to quickly obtain a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for judging whether the winning combination is right or wrong is selected. The slot machine 10 has six types of game states, namely, a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a fourth RT state, a BB state, and a CB state. A table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current game state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the game state is selected. . For example, when the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current game state is the normal game state, and the lottery table for the normal game state is displayed. select. In addition, in the slot machine 10, six levels of winning probabilities from "setting 1" to "setting 6" are prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and turned ON and a predetermined operation is performed. By doing so, it is possible to set on which winning probability the internal processing is to be executed. In step S302, when the setting state is "setting 1", the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "setting 6", the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process started by the main controller 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is performed when the power is turned on while the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned on. It is started after initialization processing. In the winning probability setting process, as a predetermined operation, the set value is updated by 1 each time the start lever 41 is operated. →"Setting 3"→"Setting 4"→"Setting 5"→"Setting 6"→"Setting 1". Each set value is displayed, for example, on the credit display section 60, and the display is updated each time the set value is updated. When the start lever 41 is operated while the setting key detection sensor 73a is turned off, this operation is taken as the confirmation operation of the setting value, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. do. The display of the credit display section 60 is also ended based on the end of the winning probability setting process. The set value set in the winning probability setting process is stored and retained in the RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, processing for selecting a lottery table is performed based on the stored set values.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. FIG. 17 is a lottery table for normal game state selected in the normal game state of "setting 3". Index values IV are set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV is set.

After the lottery table is selected, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and the determination value DV used when determining the winning combination is set in the following step S304. In this determination value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current determination value DV to set a new determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value obtained in step S301 is used as the current determination value DV, and the current index value IV of 1 and the corresponding point value PV are added to this random value to create a new value. Let the judgment value be DV.

After that, in step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. Whether or not the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 is judged in the winning judgment. If it exceeds 65535, it is determined in step S306 whether or not any of the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB has been won. Specifically, it is determined whether an affirmative determination is made in step S305 with an index value IV (IV=34 to 54) including any one of the first BB, second BB, and CB. When an affirmative determination is made in step S306, a process of setting corresponding bonus winning flags (first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, CB winning flag) in the winning flag storage area 106a is performed in step S307. If a negative determination is made in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, in step S308, the winning flag of each minor combination corresponding to the index value IV determined affirmatively in step S305 is stored in the winning flag storage area. 106a is set. For example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th minor winning flag, the 33rd minor winning flag and the 33rd minor winning winning flag are set in step S308. 35 Set a minor winning flag. When the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, a winning flag indicating that the 30th and 41st minor wins have been won is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the set winning flag is not a winning flag (1BB winning flag) indicating that the 1BB has been won or a winning flag (2BB winning flag) indicating that the 2BB has been won, the winning flag storage area 106a The winning flag that has been set is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 of normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset under one of the conditions that the corresponding winning has been established. That is, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games.

It should be noted that in steps S306 to S308 in a state in which the 1BB winning flag or the 2BB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1BB, 2BB and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, If a winning combination other than the second BB and CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV=34, the 1st BB winning flag is not set, and the 28th minor combination winning flag is not set. , the 33rd minor winning combination winning flag and the 35th minor winning combination winning flag are set. In addition, in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag is carried over, for example, when the index value IV=35 and the determination value DV exceeds 65535, the 28th minor winning flag and the 33rd winning flag are not set. A small win flag and a 35th minor win win flag are set.

A lottery table is separately prepared in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, and in a state in which the 1st BB winning flag or the 2nd BB winning flag is carried over, the lottery processing is performed by the separately prepared lottery table. may be configured to perform In this case, in the separately prepared lottery table, each index value IV and point value PV should be set so as not to win the 1st BB, 2nd BB, and CB.

If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the role corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the subsequent step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV to which 1 has been added exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is an object to be judged, the process returns to step S304 to continue judging the winning combination. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used for the judgment of the previous winning combination (that is, the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, In step S305, it is determined whether the winning combination is correct based on the determination value DV. By the way, when judging the winning combination using the lottery table shown in FIG. The probability of winning the lottery (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning the low cherry (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/183. be. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/300, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 218. 1. The probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV=19) is about 1/252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV=20) is about 252. 1/1. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is about 1/32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is about 65,500. 1. The odds of winning forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, and sandwich push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) are about 1/43.7, middle push bell The probability of winning 1, middle-pressed bell 2, right-pressed bell 1, and right-pressed bell 2 (probability of winning when IV=27 to 30) is about 1/21.8, respectively. The probability of winning the high cherry stack 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1/21800, and the probability of winning the high cherry stack 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is About 1/21800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV=36) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV=37 The probability of winning is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1/32800, and the probability of winning the strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is It is about 1/32800. The probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1/65500, the probability of winning the weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is It is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, and chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=42 to 45) is about 1/32800. The probability of winning middle bell overlap 1 and middle bell overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV=46, 47) is about 1/21800, respectively. The probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ap A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is about 1/1010, the probability of winning Special Ab Duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) ) is about 1/1310. The probability of winning the 1st BB and the 2nd BB alone (probability of winning when IV=52, 53) is about 1/32800, respectively. The probability of winning CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is about 1/19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is about 1/1.96.

Note that 0 is set for the point values PV of IV=2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58 in the lottery table for the normal game state. Therefore, in the normal game state, winning is not possible with these index values IV.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or when it is determined in step S310 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the determination of the winning combination has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

In subsequent step S312, lottery result correspondence processing is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S311, a process for notifying the winning combination, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the display control device 81 so as to grasp the result of the win/loss determination of the winning combination. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and the commands are not transmitted to the display control device 81 . Command transmission to the display control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, stop information setting processing is executed for setting symbols that can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information is set according to the winning combination based on the winning flag set in steps S306 to S308. For example, when a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the strong cherry winning flag is set, the symbols corresponding to the 28th small winning combination, the 32nd small winning combination to the 35th small winning combination are displayed on each reel 32L. , 32M, and 32R are set to stop symbol information. In addition, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won (winning when IV=34) and the strong cherry winning flag and the 1 BB winning flag are set, the 28th minor winning combination, the 33rd minor winning combination, the 35th minor winning combination and the 1st minor winning combination are set. Stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to 1BB winning can be stopped on the respective reels 32L, 32M and 32R.

In subsequent step S315, when a plurality of stoppable pattern information is set in step S314, a priority setting process for setting the priority is executed. For example, if a plurality of roles among the minor roles, replay, and bonus roles are won, the following priority order is set. Set the order of priority so that when a minor win and a bonus are won, the minor win wins preferentially, and when the minor win cannot be achieved, the bonus win wins. . When winning the replay and the bonus, the order of priority is set so that the replay win is preferentially established.

For example, when the strong cherry overlap 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th small combination, the 33rd small combination, the 35th small combination and the 1BB winning is set, the 28th is selected rather than the 1BB winning. The order of priority is set so that the small winning combination, the 33rd small winning combination, and the 35th small winning combination are preferentially established. In addition, when special reply A duplication 1 is won and stop pattern information corresponding to the ninth replay and the first BB win is set, the ninth replay win is established with priority over the first BB win. set the priority so that Then, for example, in a situation where the 1BB win is carried over, if the normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1BB win and the 1st replay win is set, then the 1BB win is higher than the 1BB win. The order of priority is set so that 1 replay win is preferentially established.

Here, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning re-games always wins when the re-game is won. In other words, when the replay is won, the replay win is always established, and no loss occurs. Therefore, when the stop symbol information for replay and bonus is set, replay winning in any of the set replays is always established, and bonus winning is not established.

Further, when a plurality of minor winning combinations or multiple replays are won in duplicate, which symbol corresponding to the minor winning combination or replay is stopped on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, when the strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st minor wins is set, as described above, the left The target symbol of the reel 32L is commonly the "watermelon" symbol. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which minor win is established. On the other hand, the target symbols of the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols in the 30th minor winning combination, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols on the middle reel 32M in the 41st minor winning combination. , the right reel 32R has a "watermelon" pattern. For example, in a 3-bet game, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when the fourth "watermelon" symbol to the seventh "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, the 30th Both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, can be stopped in the middle row on the active line. becomes. In this case, in the present embodiment, stop symbol information is set so that a symbol with a small number of slips is preferentially stopped. As a result, in the above case, stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor winning combination is not established, and the 30th minor winning combination becomes possible.

On the other hand, in the middle reel 32M, when the stopping operation of the middle stop switch 43 is performed at the timing when the eighth "black BAR" symbol to the twelfth "red bell" symbol reach the middle stage, the target for the 41st minor winning combination Both the 8th "black BAR" and 11th "cherry" symbols, which are symbols, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor combination, should be stopped in the middle row. becomes possible. In this case as well, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the smaller number of slips is preferentially stopped, so the eighth "black BAR" symbol or the eleventh "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, and the second symbol stops. The 30th minor winning combination is no longer established, and the 41st minor winning combination becomes possible.

The same applies to the right reel 32R. Depending on the timing at which the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed, the "red bell" symbol that is the target symbol for the 30th minor win and the "watermelon" symbol that is the target symbol for the 41st minor win. The stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with a smaller number of slips is stopped on the lower stage, which is the effective line. In the right reel 32R, when the sixth "first replay" symbol and the seventh "black BAR" symbol reach the effective position, the stop operation of the right stop switch 44 is performed. Neither the symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped.

After executing the process of step S315, after executing the section display first process in step S316, the lottery process ends. The first section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68 and role ratio monitor 77, and such processing will be described later in detail.

Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the subsequent step S402, rotation start processing is performed to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started rotating in the previous game. If not, the wait time has elapsed. wait until When the wait time has passed, the wait time for the next game is set again, and motor control initialization processing for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, the acceleration processing of the stepping motor is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R start rotating. Therefore, even if the player bets the prescribed number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R may not immediately start rotating. Thereafter, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R wait until they rotate at a predetermined rotational speed at a constant speed, and the rotation start processing ends. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R becomes constant, the CPU 102 can generate a stop command by turning on lamps (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. is notified to players and the like.

Following the rotation start process, in step S403, it is determined whether or not any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42-44 is operated, the process waits until one of the stop switches 42-44 is operated. If it is determined that any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, and it is determined whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated. do. If no stop command has been generated, the process returns to step S403 and waits until any one of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. When a stop command is generated, a stop command is set in step S405. Here, the stop instruction command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to grasp which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop instruction. When the stop instruction command is set, stop control processing shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the rotating reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the arrival symbol that has reached the base position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the pattern number of the arrival pattern that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the subsequent step S407, the number of reel slips to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In the slot machine 10, as the stop modes for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the arrival symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is. A stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by one symbol, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by two symbols, a stop mode in which the reel is stopped after sliding by three symbols, and a reel is stopped after sliding by four symbols. 5 patterns of stop modes are prepared. Therefore, in step S407, any value from 0 to 4 is calculated as the sliding number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated number of slips is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol to actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether or not the symbol number of the arrival symbol of the reel to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stop symbol. conduct. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R have stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

Here, the second stop information setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that is set and the stop number of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when winning is achieved when IV=23 to 30, that is, forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, sandwich push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right When winning the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order bell") (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed in order to change the winning mode established by the order of operations.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second minor winning prize, the seventh minor winning prize or the ninth minor winning prize is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first. Then, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the 1st small winning combination is established, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the 2nd small winning combination and the 7th small winning combination are set. The stop information is set so that the winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination is established. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, there are cases where the corresponding prize is not established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The pattern arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a game state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding by a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. , and only the downward-sloping line L4 is set as an effective line. Therefore, in the case where the same kind of symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol becomes effective regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43 when the winning symbol is obtained. You can stop on the line. On the other hand, as for the symbols arranged so as to form a section separated by five symbols or more, the player needs to aim at the symbols and operate the stop switches 42 to 44 when stopping on the effective line.

A case in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination or the ninth minor winning combination.

The second minor combination symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. In addition, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor symbol and also function as the ninth minor symbol. On the left reel 32L, the second minor combination symbols (between the seventh minor combination symbols, between the ninth minor combination symbols) are arranged so that the interval is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the number 4 "cherry" symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the middle row, number 7 "red bell" is displayed as shown in FIG. 20(a). The pattern stops at the upper stage. As a result, there remains room for establishing the second minor winning combination, the seventh minor winning combination, or the ninth minor winning combination on the right downward line L4.

The second minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. The "white BAR" pattern is arranged only at the 18th position on the middle reel 32M. Also, the seventh minor combination symbol of the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is arranged only at the 14th position. The ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. A "cherry" symbol is arranged only at the 11th position on the middle reel 32M. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol or the ninth minor winning symbol may stop on the active line, or the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the None of the ninth minor winning symbols stop on the active line.

Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 13th "first replay" pattern to the 17th "first replay" pattern reaches the lower stage, the second small winning combination The symbol "white BAR" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the establishment of the second minor winning combination on the right downward line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 9th "second replay" symbol to the 13th "first replay" symbol reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. , the seventh minor winning symbol "red 7" is stopped in the middle row. As a result, there remains room for the 7th minor winning combination to be established on the lower right line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "white bell" pattern to the 10th "young man" pattern reaches the lower row, the 9th minor winning pattern "cherry" pattern is in the middle row. to stop. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after being slid by four symbols, the second, seventh and ninth minor symbol symbols are displayed. It cannot be stopped in the middle stage. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second "LUCKY" symbol or the sixth "white bell" symbol stops in the middle stage.

When the seventh minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the seventh minor combination winning can be established.

The seventh minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. The right reel 32R has a "white bell" pattern only at the 10th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 6th "first replay" symbol to the 10th "white bell" symbol has reached the lower stage, FIG. As shown in , the symbol "white bell", which is the seventh minor combination symbol, stops at the lower stage. As a result, the seventh minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "second replay" symbol No. 3 has reached the lower stage, the "watermelon" symbol No. 4 will be displayed as shown in FIG. 20(d). Stop downstairs. The combination of the "red bell" symbol, the "red 7" symbol and the "watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the ninth minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the ninth minor combination winning can be established.

The ninth minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "youth" symbol. A "young man" symbol is arranged at the 15th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the ninth minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 11th "first replay" symbol to the 15th "young man" symbol reaches the lower row, the ninth minor winning symbol is obtained. The "young man" design stops at the bottom. As a result, the ninth minor winning combination is established on the right downward line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower row. The combination of "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor combination symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the stop information second setting process changes the stop information so that the second minor combination winning can be established.

The second minor combination symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. A "white BAR" symbol is arranged at the 18th position on the right reel 32R. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second minor combination symbol may or may not stop on the activated line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any one of the 14th "watermelon" symbol to the 18th "white BAR" symbol reaches the lower row, the second minor winning symbol " White BAR” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the second minor winning combination is established on the lower right line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), the "white BAR" symbol, and the "watermelon" symbol (the "first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition roll as shown in FIG.

When the second minor winning symbol, the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, the "LUCKY" symbol or the "white bell" symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage. In this case, in the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed so that the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the lower stage.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" symbols are arranged such that the interval between the "watermelon" symbols and the "first replay" is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol is stopped regardless of the operation timing. From the left, the combination of "white bell" pattern ("red bell" pattern), "LUCKY" pattern ("white bell" pattern), and "watermelon" pattern ("first replay" pattern) shifts as shown in FIG. It is a result.

In this way, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42→middle stop switch 43→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the 2nd minor winning combination and the 7th minor winning combination are established. It is one of a case where a prize is established, a case where a ninth minor winning combination is established, and a case where the transition rolls are stopped.

Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are controlled to stop in order to establish the first minor winning combination.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the "red bell" symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" pattern stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

On the left reel 32L, "red bell" symbols and "white bell" symbols, which are the first minor combination symbols, are arranged so that the interval between the first minor combination symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops on the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

A "red bell" symbol and a "white bell" symbol, which are first minor bonus symbols, are arranged on the right reel 32R such that an interval between the first minor bonus symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated for the third time, the "red bell" pattern or the "white bell" pattern stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43→left stop switch 42→right stop switch 44 is operated in this order, the first minor win is established regardless of the operation timing.

In the case of winning the pressing order bell, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operating sequences, the first minor winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing. If the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another order of operation, depending on the timing of the operation, a small winning combination will be established or the transitional number will stop on the effective line. By the way, if the middle bell is won, the 38th minor winning prize is established regardless of the operation order and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, regardless of the operation order and timing. 1 small role winning is established.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, when it is determined in step S411 that all the reels 32L, 32M and 32R are stopped, payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process of setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the combinations of winning symbols are arranged on the activated line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the stopped symbols stopped on the lower stages of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and whether or not winning is established on the active line is determined. judge. If a winning has been established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. When the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning combination are set in a payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106.例文帳に追加On the other hand, when the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is placed in an error state and an abnormality occurrence process is performed to report the occurrence of an error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After performing the payout determination process, a winning result corresponding process is performed in step S414. In the winning result handling process, processing for shifting the game state based on the winning result, etc. are performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

After the winning result handling process is performed, the second section display process is performed in step S415. The second section display processing is processing related to display control of the instruction monitor 68, and such processing will be described later in detail. After that, in step S416, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 can grasp the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a minor win has not been established. In such a case, it is determined whether or not any one of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. When none of the re-game wins have been established, the medal payout processing is terminated as it is, and when any of the re-game wins have been established, re-game setting processing is performed to change the game state to the re-game state. , to end the medal payout process. In the above-described start waiting process (step S204), the automatic input process is performed when it is determined that the current game state is the replay state.

On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the number of payouts is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the count value of the credit counter does not reach the upper limit (the number of accumulated medals is 50), the number of payouts is added to the count value of the credit counter, and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display section 60 . Further, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit while adding the number of payouts, the medal payout rotary plate is driven to eject the medals from the hopper device 51. It is paid out to the medal receiving tray 50 through the exit 49. - 特許庁In addition, in the medal payout process, a process of changing the number of payouts displayed on the payout number display section 62 in accordance with the payout of medals is also performed. Further, when the current gaming state is the BB state, the processing of subtracting the number of payouts from the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts, which will be described later, and the remaining number of payouts displayed on the remaining number of payouts display section 61 is performed. .

Next, the RT state processing of step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

In step S501, it is determined whether or not the game state is the fourth RT state by confirming whether or not the fourth RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM106. If it is in the fourth RT state, the process advances to step S502 to perform subtraction processing of the number of fixed RT games. Although a detailed description will be given later, the fourth RT state is an RT state in which the number of executable games is predetermined, and the process of step S502 is a process for subtracting the remaining number of executable games. be. In subsequent step S503, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining executable games in the fourth RT state has become 0 based on the processing result of step S502. If it becomes 0, the process of clearing the fourth RT setting flag is executed in step S504, and then the RT state process is terminated. By performing the process of step S504, the game state shifts to the normal game state. If a negative determination is made in step S503, the RT state processing is terminated. In this case, the fourth RT state continues.

If a negative determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S505 whether or not the transition roll has stopped on the active line. When the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S506, and it is determined whether or not the current game state is the normal game state. When the current game state is the normal game state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S505 that the transitional number has not stopped on the activated line, the process proceeds to step S508, and the second replay winning combination is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. Determine whether or not it is established. If the second replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S507. After that, this process is terminated. In addition, when the transition rolls stop on the activated line under a game state other than the fourth RT state and the normal game state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S509. , the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, and the process ends.

When the first RT setting flag is set in step S507, the game state shifts to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the first RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the "setting 3" first RT state. The lottery table for the first RT state differs from the lottery table for the normal game state (see FIG. 17) in the point values PV of IV=1 to 5, 13, 14, and is the same as the other index values IV. point value PV is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=6 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the normal game state, and winning at IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/173, the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is about 1/32.8, the probability of winning when IV = 13 is about 1/131, IV = 14, the probability of winning is about 1 in 655. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 1.94.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winner is IV=1, the normal replay win is won, and if the winner is IV=2, the first promotion replay 1 wins, and the IV If it is won at IV = 3, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 2, if it is won at IV = 4, it will be won in the 1st promotion replay 3, and it will be won at IV = 5 If you win the first promotion replay 4, if you win at IV = 13, you win transition replay 1, and if you win at IV = 14, you win transition replay 2. . The probability of winning at any of IV=1-5,13,14 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning the normal replay under the normal game state is also about 1/7.30. That is, when the game state shifts to the 1st RT state, each type of small win, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the normal game state, and a prize-winning mode in which the benefit of replay is given. changes to something different from the normal game state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first re-game winning that does not transition to the game state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning, the third re-game winning that shifts to the second RT state is established. , the 11th re-game winning or the 12th re-game winning that shifts to the 4th RT state is established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to winning the pressing order bell described above, when winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4 and transition replays 1 and 2 Also, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When winning the first promotion replay 1 to 4 The third replay win is always established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third replay is associated with one operation order among the six operation orders, and the first replay corresponds to the other operation orders. attached.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also distributed as winning combinations. However, these 6th to 8th replays are not associated with any of the above 6 types of operation sequences. Therefore, in the sixth to eighth replays, even if the first promoted replays 2 to 4 are won, no prizes are won regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.例文帳に追加

More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is divided into the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is divided into the first replay and the third replay. In addition to the 3rd replay, the 6th replay is distributed, in the first promotion replay 3, the 7th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and in the first promotion replay 4 Although the 8th replay is distributed in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replays are the 1st replay and the 3rd replay. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay win is established. That is, for example, if there is one type of first promotion replay, there is also one type of operation order corresponding to the third replay winning, and when the first promotion replay is won, the third replay winning is intentionally established. This is because it may be possible to This relationship is not limited to the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same applies to other overlapping roles.

FIG. 23(d) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When transition replays 1 and 2 are won, similarly to the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the 11th replay winning prize or the 12th A replay win is always established. In transition replays 1 and 2, 3 of the 6 operation orders are associated with the 11th replay, and the remaining 3 operation orders are associated with the 12th replay. .

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S508 that the second regame winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S510, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the third replay win has been established. When the third replay win is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S511, the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, and this process is terminated. do.

When the second RT setting flag is set in step S512, the game state shifts to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the second RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see FIG. 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV=1 to 14, and has the same point value PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether or not a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning when IV=15 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, and winning when IV=1. The probability of winning is about 1/11.0, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1/15.5, and IV = 9 , 10, the probability of winning is approximately 1/8.90. Moreover, when IV=13, 14, winning is not possible. The odds of not winning any role are about 1/150. That is, in the case of shifting to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game winning that does not change the game state, the second re-game winning that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game winning that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game winning Winning a prize is established.

In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the above-described first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, and second promotion replay 1 Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generate the stop command.

FIG. 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. When fall replay 1 to fall replay 3 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay win or the second replay win is established without fail. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame winning, the fourth replay winning, and the fifth replay winning is established without fail. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44, the first re-game winning or the fourth re-game winning is established without fail.

Incidentally, the number attached to the fourth replay in the figure corresponds to the symbol combination when the fourth replay win is established. "1" corresponds to a symbol combination of loose stitches, and "2" corresponds to a symbol combination of red 7, red 7, and black BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the symbol combination that becomes a loose eye stops and the fourth replay win is established, or the red 7・The red 7 and black BAR middle stop symbol combination is stopped, and the 4th replay win is established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S510 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S513, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether or not the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has been established. When the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S514, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S515. and terminate this process.

When the third RT setting flag is set in step S515, the game state shifts to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the 3RT state based on the fact that the 3RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the lottery table for the 3RT state is selected. do.

FIG. 25 is a lottery table for the 3rd RT state selected in the 3rd RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the 2nd RT state (see FIG. 24), the lottery table for the 3rd RT state has different point values PV for IV=9 to 12, and the same point values PV for the other index values IV. is set. Therefore, when judging whether a role is appropriate using such a lottery table, the probability of winning at IV=1-8, 13-58 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, IV=9, 10 , and the probability of winning at IV=11 and 12 is about 1/7.00. The odds of not winning any hand are about 1 in 150. In other words, when the game state shifts to the 3rd RT state, each role type of small combination, replay, and bonus is won with the same probability as in the 2nd RT state, and a prize-winning mode in which the privilege of replay is given. changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the 3rd RT state, in addition to the 1st re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 2nd re-game winning that shifts to the 1st RT state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state, the 6th re-game winning that does not shift the game state The 7 re-game winning, the 8th re-game winning, and the 3 re-game winning to shift to the 2nd RT state are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even when BAR replay 1 and BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command is changed. Set stop information as much as possible.

FIG. 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the BAR replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the seventh replay winning prize, or the third replay winning prize. is always established. When the BAR replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first replay winning prize, the sixth replay winning prize, the eighth replay winning prize, and the third replay winning prize. is always established.

Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S513 that the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S516, and the winning prize set in the previous payout determination processing Based on the established hand, it is determined whether or not the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize has been established. When neither the 11th re-game winning nor the 12th re-game winning has been established, the RT state processing is terminated as it is. When the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S517, and the 4th RT setting flag is set in step S518. Then, in step S519, fixed RT game number setting processing is executed, and then this processing ends. Step S519 is a process of setting the number of games that can be executed in the fourth RT state. Specifically, in step S519, a fixed RT counter provided in the various counter areas 106e has a specified value (for example, 10 when the 11th regame win is established, and 10 when the 12th regame win is established). If so, enter 15). At step S502, the fixed RT counter is decremented, and when the counter becomes 0, processing for ending the fourth RT state is executed at step S503.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S215 will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current game state is the bonus state, that is, whether or not the current game state is the BB state or the CB state. If it is not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S613 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether or not any one of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag and CB winning flag is set. If any winning flag is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. When CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in a remaining payout number counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out during the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 and S605, the game state shifts to the CB state.

Here, CB and CB state will be briefly described.

"Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, "Red Bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M, "Watermelon" symbols, "First Replay" symbols or "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R. , stops on the active line, it is a CB prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R such that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. Therefore, when the CB is won, the CB prize is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44.

The main controller 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. Then, in step S205 of normal processing, it is determined whether or not the number of bets on medals has reached "2" instead of "3". is set as a valid line.

At step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, "0" is set as the point value PV for IV=1 to 52, and "16384" is set as the point value for IV=55 to 58. is set (see FIG. 17, etc. for the correspondence between the IV and the winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning CB small and medium hand 2 (IV=56 The probability of winning at the time of ) is about 1/4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small and medium role 3 (the probability of winning at IV = 57) is about 1/4.00, and the CB The probability of winning the small and medium combination 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1/4.00. No outlier events occur.

FIG. 27(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of the CB small and medium winning combination 1 to CB small and medium winning combination 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some kind of small winning combination will be won. It will definitely come true. Since the CB state is a 2-bet game, 15 medals will be awarded when the 1st minor winning combination, 27th minor winning combination, 31st minor winning combination, 36th minor winning combination to 38th minor winning combination are established. When the payout is performed and the 2nd minor role winning ~ 26th minor role winning, the 28th minor role winning ~ 30th minor role winning, and the 32nd minor role winning ~ 35th minor role winning are established, 14 sheets Medals are paid out. In other words, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out when the state is shifted to the CB state.

In place of or in addition to the CB as the winning hand and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables the execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning hand, and the winning of the single bonus (winning a prize) ), there may be an SB state to transition to based on.

Returning to the description of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that the CB winning has not been established, it means that the bonus winning flag other than the CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not the 1st BB prize or the 2nd BB prize has been established.

When any BB prize is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the status information storage area 106c in step S611. flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and 216 is displayed on the remaining payout number display section 61. FIG. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the maximum number of payouts in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals equal to or greater than the numerical value are paid out in the BB state.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the game state shifts to the BB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the BB state based on the fact that the BB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding BB state lottery table is selected. .

FIG. 28 collectively shows the lottery table for the 1BB state selected in the 1BB state to which the 1BB prize is won and the lottery table for the 2BB state selected in the 2BB state to which the 2BB prize is won. . In the first BB state lottery table and the second BB state lottery table, "0" is set as the point value PV of IV=1-14, 22-30, and 34-58. Therefore, in either the 1st BB state or the 2nd BB state, winning is not possible with IV=1 to 14, 22 to 30, and 34 to 58. Further, in the lottery table for the 1BB state and the lottery table for the 2BB state, the point values of IV=19 to 21 and 31 to 33 are set in common in both lottery tables, and the 1BB state and the 2BB state are set. In any of the states, the probability of winning Chance A with IV=19 is about 1/65.5, the probability of winning Chance B with IV=20 is about 1/65.5, and the probability of winning Chance B with IV=21 is about 1/65.5. The probability of winning the middle bell is about 1/1310, the probability of winning the 1st role in IV=31 BB is about 1/2.12, the probability of winning the 2nd role in IV=32 BB is about 1/1310. About 1 in 13.1, the probability of winning the 3rd role in BB with IV=33 is about 1 in 13.1.

On the other hand, in the lottery table for the first BB state and the lottery table for the second BB state, different point values are set for IV=15 to 18, and the probability of winning the strong cherry with IV=15 is the same as in the first BB state. In the second BB state, it is about 1/93.6, and it is easier to win a strong cherry in the first BB state than in the second BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=16 is about 1/6.56 in the 1st BB state, whereas it is about 1/26.2 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak cherry than in the second BB state.

The probability of winning a strong watermelon with IV=17 is about 1/93.6 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/21.8 in the 2nd BB state, and the 2nd BB state is higher. It is easier to win a strong watermelon than in the 1BB state. Also, the probability of winning the weak cherry with IV=18 is about 1/26.2 in the 1st BB state, while it is about 1/6.56 in the 2nd BB state. is more likely to win a weak watermelon than in the first BB state.

That is, in the first BB state and the second BB state, the winning probability of the lottery result of so-called rare combination such as strong cherry, strong watermelon, etc. is higher than other states such as the normal game state and the first RT state to the third RT state. Comparing the first BB state and the second BB state, it is easier to win strong cherries or weak cherries in the first BB state than in the second BB state, and in the second BB state it is easier to win strong watermelons or weak watermelons than in the first BB state. It is designed to make it easier.

In addition, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, etc. can be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if they are operated at a timing that does not correspond to the winning, the winning will not be established and will be missed.

FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning combinations, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning modes established. As described above, the first minor winning combination is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. Therefore, if the 1st role in the BB is won, any of the 1st minor role winning, 39th minor role winning, or 40th minor role winning will be awarded regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. It will definitely come true. On the other hand, for the 2nd BB win and the 3rd BB win, the 1st minor win is associated with 4 of the 6 operating orders, and the 2nd minor win is associated with the 2 operating orders. The 40th minor winning combination and the 41st minor winning combination are associated with each other. In other words, if the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first minor winning combination, the 2nd winning winning combination or the 3rd winning winning winning combination during the BB wins the 1st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination. If it matches the 41st minor winning combination, the 40th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination is established instead of the 1st minor winning combination. In the 3-bet game in the BB state, 9 medals are paid out when the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, and 3 medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. In other words, when the 1st win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win is established regardless of the order of operations, and 9 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd win in the BB is won, depending on the order of operations. When the 1st minor winning combination or the 40th minor winning combination is established, 9 medals are paid out. Then, when the 3rd win in the BB is won, the 1st minor win or the 41st minor win is established depending on the order of operation, and when the 1st minor win is established, 9 medals are paid out. , three medals are paid out when the 41st minor winning combination is established. That is, for the 3rd winning combination in the BB, the number of medals to be paid out varies depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42-44.

If a negative determination is made in step S609 and any BB prize is established, a carryover command is set in step S613. The carry-over command is a command sent to the display control device 81 in order to let the player know that the bonus winning has not been established in the bonus winning game, resulting in a so-called carry-over state, and the carry-over command is a timer interrupt process. is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110).

As already explained, winning other bonuses is restricted in games played in the carryover state. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (FIG. 17), if a winning combination with a bonus (1st BB, 2nd BB, CB) of IV=34 to 51 is won, the bonuses corresponding to these bonuses are selected. Winning flag is not set. Therefore, for example, when winning a small winning combination of IV = 34 to 51 or a double winning combination with a replay, the winning flag for each small winning combination or replay is set, but the winning flag corresponding to the bonus is set. It is not set, and only small wins are valid. In other words, the carry-over state can also be said to be a state in which bonus lottery is restricted.

When the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and end determination processing is performed in step S614. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter for the number of remaining payouts has become 0, and when it has become 0, the process of clearing the CB setting flag or the BB setting flag is performed. Also, in the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, the end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. Note that the end determination processing will be described later in detail.

As shown in steps S602 to S614, when the CB is won and the CB prize is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state is returned to the game state when the CB winning was established. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the normal gaming state is restored after the CB state is ended, and when the CB winning is established under the 3RT state, the 3RT state is established after the CB state is ended. return to On the other hand, if the 1st BB or the 2nd BB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding BB prize is established. Therefore, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state ends, even if the first BB prize is established under the second RT state, the normal game state is entered. When transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect a maximum increase of 144 (=9×24-3×24) medals until the BB state ends.

As described above, if a strong cherry, strong watermelon, or the like is won in the BB state, winning may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and if the winning is not established, medals will not be paid out in the game. does not occur. Also, when winning the 3rd combination in BB, 9 or 3 medals are paid out depending on the order of operation of the stop switches 42-44. That is, in the BB state, the upper limit of the number of payouts is set (step S216), and if 9 coins are paid out every game, a maximum increase of 144 medals can be expected as described above, and the BB state ends after 24 games. However, depending on the lottery result of each game in the BB state and the operation timing and operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game, the number of medals to be increased when the upper limit number of payouts is reached may be less than the maximum number. However, it is set so that the number of games required to reach the maximum payout amount can be increased.

If none of the first BB winning flag, second BB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (NO in step S602), and none of the first BB winning prize, second BB winning prize, and CB winning prize are established, carry over. When a command is set (when the processing of step S613 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout number counter in steps S605 and S612, when end determination processing is performed in step S614, , the process advances to step S606 to set the status command. Here, the state command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to grasp the game state at the end of the game (that is, the game state of the next game). Set the status command corresponding to the set flag set in 106c. After setting the state command, in step S607, an external signal setting process for setting an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. After that, this process is terminated.

<Outline of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the game state transition will be described with reference to FIG. Illustration of the CB state is omitted.

When the game state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out under the BB state reaches 216, and the game state shifts to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the shift roll on the effective line, and the game state shifts to the BB state when the BB prize is established. The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the 2nd RT state, and the second promotion replays 1, 2 and 4th RT that trigger the transition to the 3rd RT state. Since the transition replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the state are not won, the normal game state does not transition to the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state (see FIG. 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state shifts to the second RT state when the third regame winning is established. The third replay win is established when one of the first promoted replays 1 to 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order of operation (see FIG. 23(a)). . Further, when the game state is the 1st RT state, the game state shifts to the 4th RT state when the 11th re-game winning prize or the 12th re-game winning prize is established. As already explained, the fourth RT state is a fixed RT state in which the number of games is fixed. Therefore, even if the number for transition is stopped in the fourth RT state, the transition to the first RT state does not occur. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the 1st RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2 that trigger the shift to the 3rd RT state are not won, so the state does not shift from the 1st RT state to the 3rd RT state.

When the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning prize or the fifth re-game winning prize is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning prize and the fifth replay winning prize are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (Fig. 23 (b) )reference). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the game in which is set, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the 3rd RT state, the game state shifts to the 2nd RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, when the second re-game win is established and when the transition roll is stopped on the activated line, the game state shifts to the first RT state. The third replay win is established when BAR Replay 1 or BAR Replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(c)). The second replay winning prize is established when one of fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined order (see FIG. 23(b)). The transition roll is stopped on the effective line when a game in which the pushing order bell is won is lost. In addition, when the corresponding BB prize is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the game state shifts to the normal game state, and each BB winning flag is set. When the corresponding BB prize is established in the set game, the game state shifts to the BB state.

When the game state is the fourth RT state, the game state shifts to the normal game state by completing the prescribed number of games. As described above, in the fourth RT state, the game state does not shift to the first RT state even if the transition result stops on the activated line. Although detailed description with drawings is omitted, in the fourth RT state of the slot machine 10, each game is performed using a lottery table in which the same point values PV as the point values PV in the lottery table for the normal game state are set. lottery will be held. Therefore, the re-game winning that causes the transition of the game state such as the first promoted replay 1 to the fourth promoted replay 4 in the 4th RT state is not established. The fourth RT state functions as a high-probability state in which an AT mode transition lottery, which will be described later, is performed with a high probability.

In the slot machine 10, the main controller 101 manages six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, BB state, and CB state. The main controller 101 manages five types of display modes: mode, AT mode (assist time mode), VB mode (virtual bonus mode, pseudo bonus mode), and BB mode.

FIG. 30 is a diagram showing transition of each display mode.

The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB prize or the second BB prize is established, and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of 144 medals at maximum.

When the normal mode is shifted to the BB mode, a lottery for shifting to the AT mode may be performed in the BB mode. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the mode shifts to AT mode after the BB mode ends. If the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is not won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the AT mode is shifted to the BB mode, the AT mode is restored after the BB mode ends. When the VB mode is shifted to the BB mode, the VB mode is restored after the BB mode is terminated.

Normal mode is when the push order bell is won, 1st promotion replay 1 to 1st promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, 2nd promotion replay 1, 2nd promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2. Transition replay 1, transition replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replay"). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not reported at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for switching to the AT mode is performed. If the lottery for shifting to AT mode is won, the normal mode shifts to AT mode. The normal mode does not shift to the VB mode.

The normal mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the normal mode, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. It almost corresponds to the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the 1st RT state or the 4th RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to decrease by 1.59. In the case of the second RT state to the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals decreases by about 0.06 each time one game is played.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. LV.AT mode has different transition probabilities to VB mode. 1 mode to LV. It is composed of four AT modes out of four modes, and any AT mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the normal mode. When the lottery for shifting to VB mode is won, the AT mode is shifted to the VB mode. Shift to VB mode When the game is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) without winning the lottery, the AT mode shifts to the normal mode.

LV. 1 mode to LV. The 4 modes are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode is LV. 4 mode is the highest, LV. 1 mode is set to be the lowest, and LV. 1 mode, LV. 2 mode, LV. 3 mode, LV. The order of the 4 modes is set so that the probability of winning the lottery to switch to the VB mode increases.

The AT mode corresponds to each game state of normal game state, 1st RT state, 2nd RT state, 3rd RT state, 4th RT state and CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. 44 corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state. In the AT mode, when the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time is In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the AT mode continues at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the AT mode.

The VB mode, like the AT mode, is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell wins and when the push order replay wins. The difference between the VB mode and the AT mode is that when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, in the AT mode the operation order for establishing the first replay winning prize is notified. , in the VB mode, the order of operations for establishing the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is announced (see FIG. 23(b)).

The VB mode corresponds to the normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, fourth RT state, and CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the pressing order bell wins and when the pressing order replay wins. Therefore, the VB mode corresponds to the third RT state when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the reported operation order. In the VB mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state, the first RT state, or the fourth RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the game state at that time can be expected to increase by 0.61. In the case of the second RT state or the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals increases by about 1.90 each time one game is played. Since the VB mode continues at least 25 games after the game state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

Regarding the shift of the display mode when the number of medals possessed by the player increases, the general flow is to shift from the normal mode to the AT mode, and then return from the AT mode to the normal mode. In the AT mode, a lottery for switching to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the AT mode is switched to the VB mode, and then the VB mode is returned to the AT mode, the player expects to increase the number of possessed medals. can.

Also, in AT mode, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four modes are set, and the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode differs in each AT mode. When shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, basically LV. 1 mode. LV. 1 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 2 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 2 mode, LV. 2 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. LV. 2 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to 3 modes is performed. LV. If you win the lottery to switch to 3 modes, LV. 3 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased. And LV. 3 mode, a lottery for transition to VB mode is performed, and LV. A lottery for transition to the 4 mode is performed. ATLV. If you win the lottery to switch to 4 mode, LV. 4 mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

Therefore, when shifting to AT mode, LV. 1 mode → LV. 2 mode → LV. 3 mode → LV. By promoting the 4 mode and the AT mode, the probability of transition to the VB mode increases, and a loop between the AT mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of owned medals in each display mode of the AT mode, VB mode, and BB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state are alternated by winning a prize in each replay or by stopping a transitional result. As described above, depending on the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 43 when the push order replay is won or when the push order bell is won, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition roll is stopped. In addition, in the AT mode and VB mode, when the bell is won in the order of pressing, the operation order that enables the establishment of the first minor winning combination is reported, so that an increase in owned medals can be expected.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode or the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the push order bell or the push order replay is won as described above. There is no notification of the order of operation when winning the order bell or the push order replay. Therefore, the AT mode and the VB mode are more advantageous to the player than the normal mode from the viewpoint of whether or not the press order bell and the operation order at the time of winning the press order replay are notified. That is, the AT mode and the VB mode are included in the advantageous section, which is a section in which the game can be progressed in an advantageous situation for the player by changing the winning rate of small wins and the like by notifying the operation sequence. . In this slot machine 10, a lottery for shifting to AT mode is performed by shifting to an advantageous section, and a shift to AT mode or VB mode can occur. is configured so as not to cause transition to the AT mode or the VB mode.

In contrast to the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, the AT mode transition lottery is not performed in the normal section. The state and the state before winning the AT mode can also be referred to as a chance zone mode (CZ mode) as a state in which transition to the AT mode is likely to occur.

The configuration related to the display mode will be described below.

The configuration related to the display mode can be roughly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) processing based on the winning result. and (4) processing related to notification effects on the sub side. The steps will be described in order below.

<Processing related to display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
(1) Display mode transition lottery processing is performed in the lottery result correspondence processing (step S312) of the lottery processing (FIG. 16) by the main controller 101. FIG. Therefore, the lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 31 .

In step S701, it is determined whether or not the advantageous interval flag is set in the flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 to determine whether the current game is in the advantageous interval. The advantageous section flag is a flag that is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section including the AT mode and VB mode, and is cleared when the advantageous section ends. If the advantageous section flag is not set, the process advances to step S702 to execute the advantageous section transition lottery process, and then terminates the lottery result handling process.

In the advantageous section transition lottery process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S802, the advantageous section transition lottery table is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the rate of transition to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) differs according to the lottery result of each game. As shown in FIG. 38, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as triggers for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section (hereinafter, these are referred to as Also collectively referred to as “transition triggers”). These transition triggers have the same point value PV set regardless of the set value, and there is no set difference in winning probability. Also, the probability of winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is set so that there is no set difference. That is, it is configured to perform an advantageous interval transition lottery with no set difference in the winning probability in the transition trigger role having the same appearance rate, and the transition rate to the advantageous interval is the same. By doing so, regardless of the set values of the gaming machines that can be installed in multiple gaming halls, the chances of shifting to the advantageous section become equal, and the inequality between players can be eliminated. Become.

After acquiring the lottery table in step S802, a process of acquiring random numbers for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. Dedicated counters in the various counter areas 106e are used as random numbers for the advantageous section transition lottery, and the dedicated counters are updated at predetermined intervals. Then, in step S804, an advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery is won. If the transfer lottery has been won, in step S806, the process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous section flag is executed. With this processing, it becomes possible to make an affirmative determination in step S702 of the lottery result correspondence processing (FIG. 31) for the next game and thereafter. In the subsequent step S807, a process of setting an advantageous section winning game flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game.

In the subsequent step S808, a process of setting a CZ mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. The CZ mode win flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the CZ mode, which is the state before winning the AT mode shift lottery, has been won by winning the lottery for transition to the advantageous section. Then, in step S809, by referring to the portent counters provided in the various counter areas 106e, it is determined whether or not the mode is currently set to the portent mode and the number of games is 0 or more.

Here, the omen mode is a mode in which a winning suggestion effect that suggests that you have won the CZ mode, AT mode, etc. is likely to occur. Notification of winning is made. The portent mode continues from 0 game to 32 games, and the number of games in which the portent mode continues is set to differ depending on the type of winning CZ mode or the like, whether or not a bonus is simultaneously won, and the like. In addition, when the CZ mode etc. is won at the same time as the bonus, the winning notification of the bonus is performed after passing the omen mode, and after the bonus state is completed, the notification that the CZ mode etc. was won is announced. done. Further, when the number of portent games is set to 0 games, winning notification is performed without going through the portent mode.

Furthermore, the present slot machine 10 is provided with a pseudo portent mode as a mode in which an effect similar to the portent mode is performed. The pseudo portent mode is a mode that is set when a lottery for transition to the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like has been conducted, but the lottery for transition to the CZ mode, AT mode, or the like has not been won. Then, in the pseudo omen mode, as in the omen mode, the above-mentioned winning suggestion effect is likely to occur, and then, unlike the omen mode, non-winning notification that the CZ mode, AT mode, etc. have not been won is performed. will be The pseudo-precursor mode lasts from game 0 to game 32.

The number of games in the portent mode and the pseudo portent mode are both managed by the portent counters in the various counter areas 106e. By determining whether or not the portent counter is equal to or greater than 0 in step S809, it is possible to determine whether the mode is the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode. However, the advantageous section transition lottery process is not executed in a situation where the CZ mode has already been won and the advantageous section flag is set. It shows what was done when the precursor mode was set, and shows that it is currently in the pseudo precursor mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S809 and the pseudo portent mode is not set, a process of obtaining a portent game number table from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105 is executed in step S810, and a portent game number lottery process is performed in step S811. Execute.

As shown in FIG. 40, the predictive game number table is set so that the selected predictive game number differs depending on the winning display mode. In this embodiment, the number of precursor games table is set so that the number of precursor games of 10 games is always selected when the CZ mode is won. Therefore, in the lottery process for the number of precursor games in step S811 in this embodiment, the number of precursor games is set to 10 games.

In step S812, the number of precursor games determined in step S811 is set in the precursor counters of the various counter areas 106e. The omen counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game, and when the omen counter reaches 0, the omen mode ends, and the winning notification or non-winning notification is performed. Then, in step S813, after executing the process of setting the portent command as an object to be output to the display control device 81, which is the sub-side control device, the advantageous zone shift lottery process ends. The portent command includes the lottery result that triggered the portent mode, the winning content and the number of portent games notified as the result notification of the portent mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail.

If it is determined in step S809 that the precursor counter is greater than 0 and the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor command is set in step S813 without performing the precursor game number setting processing in steps S810 to S812. to run. In this case, the portent command includes the result of the lottery that triggered the portent mode and the information of the winning content notified as the result notification of the portent mode.

If it is determined in step S805 that the advantageous section transition lottery was not won, the process proceeds to step S814. In step S814, a process of acquiring a table of the number of pseudo precursor games is executed from the various table storage area 105a, and in subsequent step S815, a lottery process for the number of pseudo precursor games is executed. In the present embodiment, the same table as the above precursor game number table is used as the pseudo precursor game number table (the precursor game number table is used). The number of games in the portent mode is set to 10 games, which is the same as the number of games in the portent mode when the CZ mode is won (when the advantageous section is won).

Then, in step S816, a process of inputting the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode to the precursor counter is executed. By this processing, the number of games in the pseudo-prediction mode is defined, and before the defined number of games is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S809. After that, in step S817, after executing a process of setting the pseudo precursor command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, this advantageous section shift lottery process is ended. The pseudo omen command includes the lottery result that triggered the pseudo omen mode, the winning content notified as the result of the pseudo omen mode, and the number of pseudo omen games. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pseudo precursor command will be described later in detail.

In the lottery result handling process, if it is determined in step S701 that the advantageous section flag is set, that is, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous section has been won before the previous game, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the AT mode transition lottery has been won, and is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won, to shift to the AT mode. A flag that is cleared when The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. This is a flag that is cleared in special zones (except when shifting to BB mode). When a negative determination is made in step S703, the first special combination process is executed in step S704.

<1st Special Win Process>
The first special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the first special combination process, a transition lottery is performed as to whether or not the display mode should be transitioned to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S902, the AT mode transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the AT mode transition lottery table, the probability of transition to AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning combination).

Specifically, in the mode lottery table in the advantageous section stored in the various table storage area 105a, the probability of winning each mode transition lottery depends on the current display mode and the type of game result that triggers the lottery. configured differently.

As shown in FIG. 39, as game results that trigger the mode transition lottery in the advantageous section, normal replay, push order replay, and push order bell are set in addition to the above shift trigger role. there is That is, regarding the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the transition lottery is set so as not to cause a difference in the transition rate due to the set value, and the transition lottery is performed based on the game result called a so-called rare combination with a particularly low winning probability, As for the lottery for transition to AT mode, etc. included in the advantageous section, a lottery chance is given to other than these rare roles, and the anticipation of each game is heightened. In the following description, these normal replay, push order replay, push order bell, and transition trigger combination are collectively referred to as a "special combination" as a combination that triggers a lottery for the instruction function in the advantageous section.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the winning probability of the transition lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, if the specific role is a strong cherry, there is a probability of about 51% that the AT mode shift lottery will be won, while if the specific role is a weak cherry, there is a probability of about 15%. It is set so that the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) in each game, the easier it is to win the AT mode transition lottery.

After obtaining the AT mode transition lottery table in step S902, a process of obtaining random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S903. Then, in step S904, an AT mode shift lottery is executed, and in step S905, it is determined whether or not the AT mode shift lottery has been won. If the AT mode shift lottery is won, in step S906, a process of setting an AT mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. By setting the AT mode winning flag, affirmative determination is made in step S703 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). In the subsequent step S907, it is determined whether or not the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. The SAT mode is an AT mode that starts after passing through a special zone for adding on. For example, if the initial number of games in the normal AT mode is 50, in the SAT mode the AT mode is started with the number of games added to the initial number of games of 50 plus the number of games added in the special zone for addition. . Therefore, the normal AT mode and the SAT mode have different advantages for the player, and the SAT mode is more advantageous for the player than the AT mode.

A lottery for transition to SAT mode is performed when a lottery for transition to AT mode is won (when a lottery is won in lottery processing in step S904), and this lottery for transition is set according to the type of transition trigger and display mode. It is done based on the transition lottery table for the SAT mode that has been set. In the SAT mode transition lottery table, as shown in FIG. 39, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by a strong watermelon is about 51%, and the probability of winning the transition lottery is about 5%. Win SAT mode.

If it is determined in step S907 that the SAT mode has been won, then in step S908 a process of setting a special zone winning flag is executed. If a negative determination is made in step S907, or if the process of step S908 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S906. The processing of steps S909 to S912 is processing for setting the portent mode.

Specifically, in step S909, a process of acquiring a precursor game number table is performed. As shown in FIG. 40, when the AT mode is won, game 0 is selected with 30%, games 1 to 5 are selected with 60%, and games 6 to 10 are selected with 10%. When winning the mode, 0 game is selected with 10%, 1 game to 5 games are selected with 70%, 6 games to 10 games are selected with 10%, and 11 games to 20 games are selected with 10%. , is set so that the number of precursor games tends to increase when winning the SAT mode, which is advantageous for the player.

In this embodiment, simultaneous winning of a bonus and AT mode or the like is not defined, but in a configuration of simultaneous winning, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on whether or not simultaneous winning occurs. Also, the number of precursor games may be varied depending on the game result that triggered the winning.

In step S910, a lottery process for the number of games in the current portent mode is performed based on the portent game number table obtained in step S909 and lottery counters obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Then, in step S911, a process of inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counters provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed.

In step S912, a process of setting the portent command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a sub-side control device, is executed. The portent command includes information on the lottery result and the number of portent games that triggered the portent mode. Processing on the display control device 81 side based on reception of the portent command will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S912, the first special combination process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S905 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, processing for setting the pseudo precursor mode is performed in steps S913 to S916. The processing of steps S913 to S916 is the same as the processing of steps S814 to S817. In the present embodiment, the number of games of the pseudo-precursor mode when the AT mode transition lottery is not won is selected to be the same as the number of games of the precursor mode when the AT mode transition lottery is won. The pseudo-prediction game number table is set as follows. That is, when the AT mode is not won, the 0 game is selected with 30%, the 1st to 5th games are selected with 60%, and the 6th to 10th games are selected with 10% as the number of pseudo precursor games. After executing the process of step S916, the first special combination process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if the determination in step S703 is affirmative, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not either the VB mode winning flag or the VB mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning the VB mode transition lottery and is cleared when shifting to the VB mode. The VB mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the VB mode, is set when shifting to the VB mode, and is cleared when the VB mode ends. If a negative determination is made in step S705, then in step S706 a second special combination process is executed. Also, if the determination in step S705 is affirmative, then in step S707, the third special combination process is executed.

<Second Special Win Process>
The second special combination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the second special winning process, an addition lottery for the AT mode is performed, and a transition lottery for whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode or the addition specialized zone is performed. It should be noted that adding means adding (increasing) the number of continuous games (remaining number) such as AT mode, and the number of additional games corresponds to the value added (increased value) to the number of continuous games. . Further, the zone specializing in addition indicates a state in which the number of continuous AT mode games is increased with a high probability over a plurality of games. In addition, in the second special winning process, an AT mode level promotion lottery is performed, and a process for increasing the number of continuous AT mode games is performed.

That is, in step S1001, a process of grasping the AT mode level is performed. As already explained, in this embodiment, LV. 1 mode to LV. Four AT mode levels of four modes are provided, and each level has a different probability of transition to the VB mode. Therefore, in step S1001, if the current AT mode level is LV. 1 mode to LV. 4 modes are determined.

In step S1002, the VB mode lottery table corresponding to the AT mode level ascertained in step S1001 is acquired from the table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. FIG. In the VB mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, for example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of transition to the VB mode is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the VB mode lottery table for each level, the probabilities of transition to the VB mode are different as a whole. LV.1 than that of 1 mode. The LV. LV.2 than that of 2 modes. The LV.3 mode has a higher probability of transition to the VB mode. LV. The four modes are set so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is higher.

In step S1003, the VB mode transition lottery is performed using the table acquired in step S1002 and the lottery random numbers (counters) acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. Then, in step S1004, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1003 corresponds to VB mode winning. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1004, a process of setting a VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S1005. After that, in steps S1006 to S1009, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed. That is, the number of precursor games table is obtained in step S1006, the number of precursor games is drawn in step S1007, the number of precursor games is set in step S1008, and the precursor command is set in step S1009. End the role process.

If it is determined in step S1004 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S1010. Steps S1010 to S1013 are processes for upgrading the AT mode level.

In step S1010, an AT mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, tables for promotion lottery are acquired from various table storage areas 105 a of ROM 105 , and random numbers (counters) for lottery are acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to AT mode levels. 1 mode table, LV. 2 mode table, LV. Tables for 3 modes and a total of 3 (the promotion lottery is not performed when staying in LV.4 mode) are provided. In each table, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set according to the type of game result that triggers the lottery. For example, between strong cherries and weak cherries, the probability of winning the promotion lottery is set higher for strong cherries than for weak cherries. Also, in the table for each AT mode, LV. LV.1 than the table for 1 mode. The LV. LV. than the table for 2 modes. The table for 3 modes is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and as the AT mode level is promoted, it is set so that it becomes difficult to be promoted to the next level.

In step S1011, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1010 was promotion winning. In the case of promotion winning, AT mode promotion processing is performed in step S1012. In this processing, the level flags provided in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 are rewritten to a level flag one level higher than the level flag corresponding to the current AT mode level. Thereafter, in step S1013, a process of setting the promotion command as an object to be output to the display control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the AT mode to be promoted. Upon receiving the promotion command, the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the like so as to perform an effect for the AT mode of the level to be promoted. As an effect for the AT mode in the auxiliary display section 65, for example, different background color effects are set according to the level of the AT mode. In addition to notifying that the level has been promoted, control is performed so that the background color for the AT mode is performed in accordance with the level of the destination of the promotion.

When it is determined in step S1011 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S1013 is executed, processing for adding the number of continuous AT mode games is performed in steps S1014 to S1021.

That is, in step S1014, lottery processing for adding the number of AT mode games is performed. In the additional lottery process, a table for AT mode additional lottery is acquired from various table storage area 105 a of ROM 105 , and a random number (counter) for lottery is acquired from various counter areas 106 e of RAM 106 . As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode additional lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the additional lottery differs depending on the type of lottery result.

Here, in the present embodiment, the lottery for addition to the number of games in the AT mode is set so that a special combination including push-order bell, push-order replay, and normal replay is used as a trigger for transition. As shown in FIG. 41, among the specific roles, the push order bell, push order replay (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order role"), and normal replay are compared to the transition trigger role in the AT mode game. The winning probability of the number addition lottery is set low. Therefore, it is expected that the number of games in the AT mode will be increased in the case where the shift opportunity role appears rather than in the case where the winning role or the normal replay appears as the lottery result of each game. Then, it is considered that the player advances the game on the premise that he/she expects to win the transition opportunity role. On the other hand, the winning combination and normal replay have a higher winning probability in each game than the transition opportunity combination, and can be said to be a game result that appears relatively easily. By adopting such a combination, it is possible to reduce the presence of the push-up combination and normal replay as an additional opportunity combination, and to increase the unexpectedness when an additional combination occurs. In addition, the chances of these push-ups and additions based on normal replays are realistically possible during AT mode (more specifically, if the initial number of games, 50, is played 2 or 3 times, only 1 is the rate of appearance that will occur). Therefore, it is possible to favorably generate unexpected additions, such as the above-mentioned push-up and additions triggered by normal replays.

In the subsequent step S1015, it is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1016 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1017 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. In the lottery process for the number of added games, a table for lottery for the number of AT mode added games is obtained from various table storage areas 105a of ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for lottery is obtained from various counter areas 106e of RAM 106. FIG. As shown in FIG. 41, the AT mode additional game number lottery table is set so that the additional game number differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the high cherry game, 20 to 200 games are added to the AT mode, and the average number of added games is 30 games. In addition, with weak cherries, 5 to 300 games are added, and the average number of games added is 20 games. The average value is set so that the number of games with strong cherries is larger.

In step S1018, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. In this process, a counter for managing the number of continuous AT mode games (more specifically, an AT mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) is set to a value corresponding to the number of additional games selected in step S1017. Perform addition processing. In the following step S1019, an addition notification process for notifying that the addition lottery has been won and the number of games is performed.

<Additional notification processing>
Here, in the slot machine 10, a plurality of modes of addition notification are set when an increase in the number of continuous games in the AT mode occurs. More specifically, there are a plurality of modes in which the game in which the additional notification is performed is different as the mode of the additional notification, and the additional notification is given in the game in which the additional notification occurs or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the additional notification occurs. (In the following description, also referred to as "immediate addition notification"), and in the case of performing an additional notification in which the game is later than the game in which the addition occurred and the notification game is determined after the fact (In the following description, " (Also referred to as "post-boarding notification") is set.

In the instant addition notification, a series of games triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred means, for example, a case in which a sign mode or a continuous effect occurs in response to a game in which an addition has occurred. A series of games is defined as a series of games that can be continued over a plurality of games from the game in which the addition occurred. The series of games includes cases where continuous effects do not occur. The game in which the addition occurs and the game until the addition notification occurs are regarded as a series of games, and the aspect of the addition notification is also included in the immediate addition notification.

On the other hand, in the post-addition notification, the game that is determined after the game after the game in which the addition occurred is not determined in the game in which the addition occurred, but for example, just before the end of the AT mode. This is different from the series of games in the immediate boarding notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post facto as the AT mode progresses, such as a game. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by a game in which an addition has occurred.

An overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 will be described with reference to FIG.

As described above, the immediate boarding notification is for notifying a part of the number of remaining games in the AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG), and the post-boarding notification is for the remaining games in the AT mode, etc. The number will be reported later. Assuming that the number of games to be notified first is a display remaining counter HG, and the number of games to be notified later is a counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone ZG) is It is equal to the total value of the display remaining number counter HG and the post-loading counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by 1 each time the game is completed, and the post-loading counter BG is not decremented unless the post-loading notification occurs even if the game is completed.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the present embodiment, the number of remaining games displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 (remaining game number display ZGP) is a predetermined number (1) while the AT mode is being executed. When this is the case, that is, when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), the post-loading notification is generated. In the post-addition notification, it is reported that the number of games corresponding to the post-addition counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the reported amount (becomes 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the post-addition report to the remaining game on the auxiliary display section 65. The number display ZGP also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 in the figure after completing one game).

In this way, when the extra winning is selected, a difference can occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). On the other hand, when the immediate boarding notification is selected, there is no difference between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in the AT mode or the like (the number of remaining games in the advantageous section ZG). In this slot machine 10, the add-on counter BG is referred to when the add-on win is made, and whether the add-on notification is selected or the immediate add-on notification is selected depends on the current value of the add-on counter BG.

In the above-described addition notification processing in step S1019, the game for which the addition notification is to be performed is set, and when the addition notification is to be performed in the game, the execution timing of the addition notification is set. That is, as shown in FIG. 35, first, in step S1101, a process of grasping the trailing counter BG of the various counter areas 106e is performed. In subsequent step S1102, a notification game lottery process is executed. The notification game lottery process is a lottery process for determining whether the current addition notification should be a post-addition notification or an immediate addition notification. In the information game lottery process, a post-loading lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery is performed to determine whether or not post-loading notification is to be performed according to the value of the post-loading counter BG grasped in step S1101.

As shown in FIG. 43, the add-on lottery table is set so that the probability of selecting the add-on notification is different depending on the value of the add-on counter BG and the type of the specific combination that triggered the add-on win. there is For example, at the time of addition triggered by a strong cherry, if the subsequent addition counter BG is less than 30, the subsequent addition notification is selected at 20% (the immediate addition notification is selected at 80%). When the add-on counter BG is 30 or more and less than 100, the add-on notification is selected at 10%, and when the add-on counter BG is 100 or more, the add-on notification is selected at 5%, so that the value of the add-on counter BG is large. It is set so that the selection rate of the post-boarding notification becomes lower as the number increases.

In addition, as the type of specific role that triggered the additional winning, there are various types rather than so-called rare roles (low probability trigger result, low probability result) with relatively low winning probability such as strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon. So-called normal roles (high-probability trigger result, high-probability result) with a relatively high winning probability, such as push-order replay and various push-order bells, have a higher pick-up selection rate when the pick-up counter BG value is small. is set. More specifically, in notification game lottery processing triggered by various push order replays and various push order bells, if the post-addition counter BG is less than 30, the post-addition notification is selected with a probability of 100%.

As described above, the post-addition counter BG is decremented by the addition notification after the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, basically, as the AT mode game progresses, the value of the trailing counter BG often increases. It is likely to be a small value.

That is, when an additional winning is made in the early stages of the AT mode game, the probability that the subsequent addition notification is selected is high, especially when an additional winning is triggered by a normal combination that is not a rare combination such as a push order replay or a push order bell. If it is the early stages of the AT mode, the subsequent notification is always selected. As a result, after the AT mode is started, the trailing counter BG tends to accumulate relatively early.

After the notification game lottery process is executed in step S1102, it is determined in step S1103 whether or not the additional lottery has been won. If the additional winning game is not won and the immediate addition notification is selected, in step S1104, the process of adding the current additional winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter areas 106e is performed. Then, in step S1105, notification timing setting processing is executed for setting at which timing the additional notification is to be performed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process of setting at what timing in the current game the additional notification is to be performed.

In one game, the addition notification is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of addition games. Specifically, as shown in the execution timing table of FIG. 44, as the execution timing of the additional notification in the current game, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the order of stop operation, reel 1, reel 2, and reel 3. Then, the time of the stop operation of the first reel, the time of the stop operation of the second reel, and the time of the stop operation of the third reel are set. Then, among the stop operations of each reel, the timing at which the stop ON operation is performed when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, the timing when the stop OFF operation is performed when the pressing operation is completed, is set.

Here, a supplementary description will be given of how the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the frontmost side to an operating position arranged on the farthest side. In the state of being arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in a LOW state, and by operating from the initial position to the operation position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are lowered. The LOW signal is switched to the HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been pressed, based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

Also, the stop switches 42 to 44 are biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are released from the hand and the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the urging force of the spring or the like. return to In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from HI signals to LOW signals. Based on the fact that the detection signal has switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal, the main controller 101 recognizes that the stop OFF operation has been performed, ie, the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 has ended.

The addition notification is set so that it can occur both when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated to stop ON and when the stop is OFF. In other words, in a game in which an additional notification occurs, the additional effect can occur not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation ends.

In the addition notification execution timing table, when the number of games to be added is relatively small, for example, 5 games to 10 games are added, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%. , the timing of the stop OFF operation of the first reel is 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 15%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 20%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 20%, The stop OFF operation of the third reel (when all reels are stopped) is 30%, and each is selected. In this case, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation of each reel, and the operation on the rear side is more likely to be selected.

On the other hand, when the number of games with a relatively large number of games to be added is, for example, 100 games or more, the timing at which the stop ON operation of the first reel is performed is selected at 5%, and the stop OFF operation of the first reel is selected. is performed 10%, the stop ON operation of the second reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the second reel is 30%, the stop ON operation of the third reel is 5%, the stop OFF operation of the third reel ( When all reels are stopped) is 45%, and each is selected. In this case as well, the stop OFF operation of each reel is more likely to be selected than the stop ON operation, and the operation on the rear side is relatively more likely to be selected.

In other words, in the present embodiment, it is set so that the additional notification is more likely to occur during the stop OFF operation than during the stop ON operation of each reel. Further, when the first to third reels are compared, the stop operation (ON operation, OFF operation) of the third reel is most likely to be selected, the stop operation of the second reel is second most likely to be selected, and the first reel is stopped. It is set so that it is the least likely to be selected during operation.

In terms of the relationship with the number of additional games, the greater the number of additional games, the more likely it is that the third reel stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, when the player is aware of the occurrence of the additional notification in advance, if the additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel stop ON operation is performed, the player is greatly affected by the occurrence of the addition of a large number of games. It is considered that the third reel stop OFF operation is executed while expecting.

In step S1105, the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game is set based on the execution timing table of the addition notification. After that, the process for addition notification is terminated. In this case, the information that the current addition is notified in the current game as an immediate addition notification, and the information regarding the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game are executed following the addition notification processing. It is set as an add-on command in the add-on command setting process (step S1020). The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including these information sets the add-on notification effect based on these information. This processing will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1103 that the post-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, a process of adding the current number of additional games to the post-addition counter BG provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. Then, in step S1107, after performing the process of setting the post-add flag in the various flag storage area 106d, the add-on notification process is terminated.

The post-boarding flag is set by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101 to indicate that the post-boarding notification should be performed when the value of the post-boarding counter BG is greater than 0 and the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined value. It is a flag for grasping. Further, in this case, in the addition command setting process executed subsequent to the addition notification process, information indicating that the addition notification will not occur in the current game is set in the addition command. The display control device 81 that receives the add-on command including this information performs control so that the add-on notification is not generated in the current game.

Returning to the description of the second special combination process (FIG. 34), after the addition notification process is executed in step S1019, an addition command including the processing result of the addition notification process is sent to the display control device 81 in step S1020. After performing the process of setting it as an output target, the second special combination process is terminated. The add-on command includes information that the add-on has occurred, the number of add-on games, and the target of the add-on.

If the bonus winning flag is set in step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1021. In step S1021, the AT mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second special combination process is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the condition for adding the number of games in the AT mode is satisfied. Although the details will be described later, if the bonus ends in a situation where the AT mode add-on flag is set, the AT mode is added on at the end of the bonus. That is, it is set so that the game to which the additional notification is performed differs depending on whether or not the bonus is simultaneously won.

If it is determined in step S1015 that the additional lottery is not won, the process proceeds to step S1022. In step S1022, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. That is, when a player wins a special role in the AT mode and does not win a lottery for transition to the VB mode or a lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode, etc., a lottery for transition to a specialized zone is performed. In the special zone lottery process, a table for the special zone shift lottery is acquired from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and a random number (counter) for the lottery is used to determine whether the display mode is to be shifted to the special zone. lottery. As shown in FIG. 39, the special zone transfer lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the transfer lottery differs depending on the type of specific combination. For example, a special zone transfer lottery based on strong cherries wins with a probability of about 5%, and a special zone transfer lottery based on weak cherries wins with a probability of about 0.8%. On the other hand, the special zone transfer lottery based on strong watermelon wins with a probability of about 2%, and the special zone transfer lottery based on weak watermelon wins with a probability of about 0.8%.

In step S1023, based on the result of the process in step S1022, it is determined whether or not the lottery for moving to the specialized zone has been won. When winning, in step S1024, a process of setting a special zone winning flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. Then, in step S1025, a process for obtaining a precursor game number table is performed, in step S1026, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed, in step S1027, a process for setting the number of precursor games is performed, and in step S1028, a precursor command is executed. is set, the second special combination process is terminated. The processes of steps S1025 to S1028 are similar to the processes of steps S1006 to S1009, for example, and are processes for setting the portent mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S1023 and none of the lottery for transition to VB mode, the lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode, or the lottery for transition to specialized zone is not won, pseudo-addition notification is performed in step S1029. After performing the processing, the second special combination processing is terminated. The pseudo-additional notification process is a process for sustaining the sense of expectation by generating an effect similar to that at the time of winning even if the lottery is not won.

<Third Special Win Process>
Next, the third special combination processing executed in step S707 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the third special combination process, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the AT mode and a lottery for transition to a specialized zone are performed. That is, in step S1201, AT mode game number addition lottery processing is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S1014. Note that the odds of winning the additional lottery may differ between the lottery process in step S1014 and the lottery process in step S1201.

In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the result of the lottery in step S1201 was an additional winning result. If it is determined that the additional lottery has been won, it is determined in step S1203 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1204 to perform lottery processing for the number of additional games in the AT mode. Then, in step S1205, AT mode game number addition processing is performed, in step S1206 addition notification processing is performed, and in step S1207 the addition command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. , ends the third special combination processing. The processing of steps S1203 to S1207 is the same as the processing of steps S1016 to S1020. Note that the number of additional games may differ between the lottery process in step S1016 and the lottery process in step S1204.

If a negative determination is made in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, a lottery for transition to the specialized zone is executed. In other words, even if a special winning combination is won in the VB mode and the lottery for adding the number of games in the AT mode is not won, the lottery for transition to the specialized zone is performed. The specialized zone lottery process is the same as the process of step S1022, and is performed based on the table for the specialized zone transfer lottery (FIG. 39). The processing of steps S1210 to S1216 is the same as the processing of steps S1023 to S1029. Also, if it is determined in step S1203 that the bonus winning flag is set, the AT mode addition flag is set in step S1207, and then the third special combination processing is terminated. The AT mode addition flag is as described above.

Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). After any one of steps S704, S706, and S707 is executed, it is determined in step S708 whether or not the result of the current lottery process is a push order replay or a push order win for the push order bell. . In the case of winning the pushing first hand, the pushing first hand process is executed in step S709. The pushing process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S708, or if the process of step S709 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S710. In step S710, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the additional special zone is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As described above, after the specialized zone winning flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to the SAT mode or the lottery for transition to the specialized zone, the transition to the specialized zone occurs. This is a flag that is set when the player wins (when the 7th regame win is established). If the specialized zone flag is set in step S710, the specialized zone processing is executed in step S711. When a negative determination is made in step S710, or after the process of step S711 is executed, this lottery result corresponding process is ended.

<Processing for specialized zone>
The specialized zone processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the special zone processing, first, in step S1301, the result of the current lottery processing is grasped. In the subsequent step S1302, AT mode add-on game number lottery processing is performed. In the following step S1303, AT mode game number addition processing is performed. Then, in step S1304, an addition notification process is executed, and after an addition command is set in step S1305, the special zone process ends. The processing of steps S1302 to S1305 is the same as the processing of steps S1017 to S1020. However, the number of games to be selected is larger in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1302 than in the number-of-addition-games lottery process in step S1017 (FIG. 41). In addition, in the specialized zone, regardless of the game result, it is set so that the number of AT mode games is always added (FIG. 41).

As described above, in the lottery result handling process, if it is not in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to the advantageous section is performed, and if it is in the advantageous section, a lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode or continuation of AT mode is performed. Processing for adding the number of games and the like are performed. In other words, even if you win a special role, if it is a normal section instead of an advantageous section, the lottery for transition to AT mode or VB mode, processing for adding the number of continuous games in AT mode, etc. will basically not be performed. and limits its implementation. In other words, the normal section can be said to be a section in which execution of processing related to the instruction function such as the AT mode is restricted compared to the advantageous section. When the lottery for transition to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the fact that the lottery for transition is won is notified after the premonitory game is played. Therefore, the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for Transitioning Game State Based on Display Mode Transition Lottery Results>
(2) In the processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the processing for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the game state are performed. A process for performing is performed. Therefore, first, a description will be given of the processing related to the notification that the transfer lottery has been won.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode change notification process is a process that is executed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is the specified number). The mode change notification process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursory games is counted in the winning result handling process described later, and the number of precursory games (the number of games in the precursory mode or the number of games in the pseudo precursory mode) is decremented by one each time one game is played. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the bonus winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning a bonus. If the bonus winning flag is set, the bonus winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1403, and then this mode transition notification processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the bonus winning notification command notifies that the bonus has been won by, for example, displaying "Bonus confirmed!!" It should be noted that the type of the winning bonus (either the first BB or the second BB) may be notified together.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when the bonus and the AT mode are won at the same time, the AT mode and the like are announced when the bonus announced in step S1403 ends. The processing related to such winning notification will be described in detail later, but when winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with bonus winning notification, winning notification such as AT mode is performed in accordance with the bonus winning notification command set in step S1403. A configuration in which a command is set is preferable.

If a negative determination is made in step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the CZ mode. If the CZ mode winning flag is set, the CZ mode winning flag is cleared in step S1405. Then, in step S1406, the CZ mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The CZ mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the current display mode is the CZ mode. In step S1407, the CZ mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the CZ mode is started. Such notification will be described later in detail.

After that, in step S1408, counting of the number of CZ mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continuous games in the CZ mode is set in the CZ mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1408, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1404 that the CZ mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the AT mode. If the AT mode winning flag is set, the AT mode winning flag is cleared in step S1410. Then, in step S1411, the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The AT notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state in accordance with winning the AT mode shift lottery. After that, in step S1412, an AT mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the AT mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1412, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the mode of notification of winning in the SAT mode is different from the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode. Therefore, in step S1407, it is preferable to set the AT mode winning notification command so as to include information as to whether it is the SAT mode or not. The AT mode winning notification mode and the SAT mode winning notification mode may be different as long as they are identifiable by the player, and more preferably, the winning notification mode for the SAT mode, which has a higher degree of advantage. It is preferable that the mode is more flashy than the mode of notification of winning in the AT mode.

It should be noted that the AT mode and the SAT mode may be configured to share the winning notification mode. By doing so, it is possible to make it look as if the content of winning has been promoted from the AT mode to the SAT mode from the AT mode winning notification game to the start notification game, and the AT mode winning notification is made. It is possible to eliminate delays due to the difference between the game and the start notification game.

If it is determined in step S1409 that the AT mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1413 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current portent mode is a portent mode triggered by winning the VB mode. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1414. Then, in step S1415, the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the game state to the 3rd RT state when the lottery for transition to the VB mode is won. After that, in step S1416, a VB mode winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the player has won the VB mode transition lottery. Such notification will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S1416, this mode transition notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1413 that the VB mode winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether or not the special zone winning flag is set. If it is not set, the mode change notification process is terminated. When it is set, in step S1418, processing for clearing the special zone winning flag is performed. Then, in step S1419, a process of setting a specialized zone notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is performed. The special zone notification flag is a flag for executing the pressing order notification corresponding to the seventh regame winning. After the process of step S1419 is executed, the special zone winning notification command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1420, and then this mode transition notification process is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the specialized zone winning notification command controls the auxiliary display section 65 and the speaker 64 so as to notify that the specialized zone has been won.

That is, of the CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone that transition through the precursor mode, the CZ mode is changed based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. be started. On the other hand, for the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone, only notification of winning the AT mode transition lottery or VB mode transition lottery is based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0. The AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone are not started even if the number of precursor games becomes 0. This is because the CZ mode as a display mode does not involve the transition of the game state, while the AT mode and the VB mode involve the transition of the game state. This is due to the difference that VB mode is initiated by transitioning to the third RT state. As for the specialized zone, there are cases where the transition of the game state is not accompanied (from the 3rd RT state to the 3rd RT state). The processing configuration is as described above.

As already explained, the 2nd RT state is entered when the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, and the 3rd RT state is entered into the second promoted replays 1 and 2. , and when the 4th and 5th replay wins are established. Then, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay win is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won and the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, This is the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay win or the like. Therefore, when a lottery for shifting to the AT mode or VB mode is won, the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in the game in which the player wins the winning combination for shifting the game state. It is configured to allow the game state to be shifted. It should be noted that from the notification of winning the AT mode or VB mode transition lottery to the start of the AT mode or VB mode (until the game state transitions), notification as a preparation state (for example, " In preparation") is performed.

<Description on transition of display mode>
The notification process for shifting the game state is performed in the pushing process (step S710) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the pushing process, the outline of the case where the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
Notification of the order of operations at the time of winning a winning hand (push order notification, push order notification effect, order notification, mode notification) is mainly performed by the auxiliary display section 65 and the instruction monitor 68 . Here, the pressing order notification effect on the auxiliary display section 65 will be described by taking as an example a case where the pressing order combination is won in the case where the operation order to be notified this time is middle→right→left. Notification of the pressing order on the instruction monitor 68 will be described later in detail.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), in the auxiliary display section 65, among the three buttons displayed in parallel corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first (middle stop in the figure) is displayed. The middle button display corresponding to the switch 43) is given the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). As a result, the player can recognize the combination that has been won in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43 . In the auxiliary display section 65, the right stop switch 44 is the next stop switch to be operated, and the left stop switch 42 is the last stop switch to be operated. 2 is added and displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 added.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44 .

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. Button display is displayed large. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42 .

To explain the execution timing of the pressing order notification, the pressing order notification is performed during the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R to constant speed rotation through the acceleration period. is set to run. In this way, by adopting a configuration in which the pressing order notification is executed before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. , and the game can be progressed at a good tempo.

<Pushing down process>
Next, referring to the flow chart of FIG. 47, the pushing process executed in step S710 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described.

In step S1501, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1-4. The affirmative determination in step S1501 means that the first replay or the third replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process advances to step S1502 to determine whether or not the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 or not. As already explained, the AT notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the AT mode transition lottery in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1503, processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the third replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1504, a process of setting a push order notification command as an output target to the display control device 81, which is a control device on the sub side, is performed, and then the main push order process is terminated. The pressing order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on the reception of the pressing order notification command will be described later in detail.

In step S1503, the operation sequence corresponding to the third re-game winning is notified, basically, the AT mode shift lottery is won, and the AT mode winning notification is performed after the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after switching to the AT mode and before the transition to the AT mode. That is, in the lottery table in the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promoted replays 1 to 4 are won only in the 1st RT state. However, even in the AT mode, the game state may fall from the 2nd RT state to the 1st RT state due to an erroneous operation, etc. Even in such a case, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 will be won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

If a negative determination is made in step S1501, it is determined in step S1505 whether or not the lottery result of this time is one of fall replays 1-3. The affirmative determination in step S1505 means that the first replay or the second replay wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1506, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set, in step S1507, processing for notifying the pressing order of the first re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation order corresponding to the first replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1508, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

In this way, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the state where the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the operation order corresponding to the third replay win is notified, thereby changing the game state to the third. It becomes possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1502, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, there are cases where the first replay win is established and cases where the third replay win is established. , there is.

In addition, when falling replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notifying the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning prize. It is possible to prevent it from happening. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1506, the pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay winning may be established by winning the falling replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the 1st RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the 3rd replay win, and the 3rd replay win is established. Even in the case of (even in the case of transition to the second RT state), the second replay winning prize can be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3. Therefore, as described above, even if the AT mode is not won by chance and the game shifts to the second RT state, the game immediately shifts to the first RT state thereafter.

If a negative determination is made in step S1505, it is determined in step S1509 whether or not the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Affirmative determination in step S1509 means that the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins according to the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1510, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1511 whether or not the VB notification flag or the specialized zone notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. FIG. As already explained, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be. The specialized zone notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursory games in the precursory mode becomes 0 after winning the special zone transition lottery in the mode transition notification processing (FIG. 45). be.

When the notification flag for VB or the notification flag for specialized zone is set, in step S1512, the process for notifying the pressing order of the fourth re-game or fifth re-game is executed. Specifically, of the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth regame winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1513, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1510, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1511, then in step S1507 the process for notifying the pressing order of the first replay is executed, and in step S1508 the process of setting the pressing order notifying command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, when winning the second promotion replays 1 and 2 without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning prize is performed, and the AT mode is performed. If it is not in the mode, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1509, it is determined in step S1514 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. Affirmative determination in step S1514 means that one of the first replay, third replay, and sixth to eighth replays wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1515, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the notification flag for AT is set and the notification flag for special zone is set, in step S1517, the process for notification of the pressing order of the seventh regame is executed. Specifically, among the first replay, the third replay, and the sixth to eighth replays, the operation order corresponding to the seventh replay win is reported (see FIG. 23(c)). After that, in step S1518, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated.

If a negative determination is made in step S1515, the pushing order process is terminated as it is without performing the pushing order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1516, then in step S1503 processing for notifying the pressing order of the third replay is executed, and in step S1504 processing for setting the pressing order notification command is performed. Terminates the regular running process. Therefore, in the case of winning the BAR replay without winning the VB mode or the special zone, if the AT mode is in effect, the pressing order notification effect corresponding to the third replay win is performed, and the state shifts to the second RT state. is generated, and if the AT mode is not in effect, the pressing order notification effect is not performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1514, it is determined in step S1519 whether or not the result of the current lottery is winning of the bell in order of pressing. If the pressing order bell is won, it is determined in step S1520 whether or not the AT notification flag is set. If it is set, in step S1521, a process for notifying the order of pressing for notifying the order of operations corresponding to the winning of the first minor combination is executed (see FIG. 19). After that, in step S1522, a process of setting a pressing order notification command is performed, and then the actual pressing order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1520, the main pushing order process is terminated without performing the pushing order notification process.

It should be noted that if the pressing order bell is won in a situation where the notification flag for AT is set (if affirmative determination is made in step S1520), if the game state of this time is the normal game state, it corresponds to the first minor winning prize. It is preferable not to notify the pressing order. By doing so, the transition output is stopped, and the game state is shifted to the 1st RT state, that is, after that, the first promotion replay 1 to 4 wins and the transition to the high RT state is possible. It becomes possible.

If a negative determination is made in step S1519, it is determined in step S1523 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay. In the case of transition replay winning, the special notification process is executed in step S1524, and then the pushing process ends. Also, if a negative determination is made in step S1523, the pushing process ends. The special notification process in step S1524 is a process for shifting to the fourth RT state when winning the transition replay. In the special notification process, for example, which of the 11th re-game winning prize and the 12th re-game winning prize is to be won is determined by a lottery or the like, and the operation order (FIG. 23(d)) according to the lottery result. Performs processing for generating notification and pushing order notification effect.

<Processing for switching the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for Winning Results>
Next, as a result of performing the notification for shifting the game state as described above, the processing when the winning combination corresponding to the shift of the game state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). The winning result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1601, game number management processing is executed. Although the details will be described later, in this game number management process, in addition to counting the number of precursor games in the precursor mode, the number of continued games in the AT mode, VB mode, and specialized zone, etc. are counted. In the subsequent step S1602, a post-loading notification process is executed. The post-addition notification process is a process for performing the post-addition notification described with reference to FIG. On the condition that there is a post-loading counter BG, the post-loading notification (post-loading notification) is executed. Then, the value corresponding to the executed addition notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the addition counter BG, and the addition flag is cleared under the condition that the addition counter BG is 0.

In the following step S1603, it is determined whether or not the result of this stop is the third replay winning. As described above, when the third regame winning has been established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the processing for shifting the game state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1604, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. The case where the AT notification flag is not set is the case where the third re-game winning is established without the conditions for shifting to the AT mode being established. The winning result handling process is terminated as it is. If the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1605 whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode. In addition to the AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided as flags for specifying the display mode. In this embodiment, when the display mode is a mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone) corresponding to the RT state higher than the AT mode, the AT mode flag is the flag corresponding to that mode (VB mode flag, specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, in step S1605, when it is determined that the AT mode flag is set, in addition to the AT mode, the VB mode and the specialized zone are included. .

In step S1605, if the AT mode flag is set, the display mode is already AT mode, so the process for dealing with winning results is terminated. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, the process for starting the AT mode is performed in steps S1606 to S1609.

That is, in step S1606, the AT mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1607, the AT mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the AT mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After that, in step S1608, counting of the number of AT mode continuations is started. Specifically, the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is set to the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continuation games in the AT mode.

After performing the process of step S1608, it is determined whether or not the specialized zone flag is set in step S1609. A positive determination in step S1609 means that the AT mode won this time is the SAT mode. In this case, after clearing the special zone winning flag in step S1610, (steps S1619 to S1621). The processing for starting the additional specialized zone will be described later. If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the winning result handling process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1603 that the third replay winning has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the fourth and fifth replay wins have been established as a result of this stop. As described above, when the fourth and fifth replay wins are established, the RT state processing (FIG. 21) performs processing for shifting the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1612, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth and fifth re-game wins are established without winning the VB mode transition lottery. , the winning result handling process is terminated. If the VB notification flag has been set, it is determined in step S1613 whether or not the VB mode flag has been set. If the VB mode flag is set, the display mode is already the VB mode, so the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1614 to S1616.

That is, in step S1614, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the AT mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage area 106d. This is because the VB mode is a mode that shifts through the AT mode, and the shift to the AT mode is always made after the VB mode ends.

After that, in step S1615, a VB mode start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. The display control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1616, counting of the number of VB mode continuations is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 25) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in a VB mode continuous counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1616, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1611 that the fourth and fifth replay winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1617. In step S1617, it is determined whether or not the seventh regame winning has been established as a result of this stop. In this embodiment, when the seventh replay winning has been established, that is, the middle stage of the left reel 32L has a "black BAR" symbol, the middle stage of the middle reel 32M has a "black BAR" symbol, and the middle stage of the right reel 32R has a "black BAR" symbol. When the "black BAR" pattern stops and the "black BAR" pattern stops on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the special addition zone. It should be noted that the case where the 7th re-game winning has been established means that BAR Replay 1 has been won and the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated in the operation order corresponding to the 7th re-game winning. There is (FIG. 23(c)).

If the seventh replay winning has been established, it is determined in step S1618 whether or not the specialized zone notification flag is set. When the specialized zone notification flag is set, processing for starting the specialized zone is performed in steps S1619 to S1621. As already described, when the SAT mode is started, even if the affirmative determination is made in step S1609 and the process of step S1610 is performed, the process of steps S1619 to S1621 is performed.

Specifically, in step S1619, a process of setting a specialized zone flag in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106 is performed. The specialized zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is an additional specialized zone. By setting the specialized zone flag, the number of continuous games in AT mode or VB mode is counted. be stopped. In this case, an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag may coexist in the various flag storage area 106d.

After that, in step S 1620 , the specialized zone start command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 . The display control device 81 that has received the special zone start command uses the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify that the special zone will start from the next game. Such notification will be described later in detail. Then, in step S1621, counting of the number of continuous specialized zones is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in the special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. FIG. After performing the process of step S1621, the process for dealing with the winning result is terminated.

When it is determined at step S1617 that the seventh regame winning has not been established, or when a negative determination is made at step S1618, the process proceeds to step S1622. In step S1622, it is determined whether or not the 11th and 12th regame wins have been established as the result of this stop. If a negative determination is made in step S1622, the winning result handling process is terminated. When an affirmative determination is made in step S1622, after executing fourth RT transition processing corresponding to shifting the gaming state to the fourth RT state in step S1623, the winning result corresponding processing is terminated. In the fourth RT transition processing, processing for notifying corresponding to the winning eleventh re-game or twelfth re-game (for example, processing for notifying the number of games in the fixed RT state) is performed.

As described above, in particular, processing for shifting the display mode separately from the RT state processing (FIG. 21) based on the winning of the combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state from the 2nd RT state to the 4th RT state. I do. This is to avoid the AT mode or the like from being started based on the winning of a winning combination corresponding to changing the game state by chance, even though the display mode transition lottery has not been won. is.

In addition, at the time of transition of the display mode, among those accompanied by the transition of the game state, transition to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode to the AT mode, when shifting from the AT mode to the VB mode, or when shifting from the AT mode When shifting from the or VB mode to the special zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of shifting to a lower mode, for example, when the game state shifts due to the second replay win as a fall replay or the stop of the transition roll, the display mode shift is not performed. When shifting to such a lower mode, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when shifting to these lower modes, there is a possibility that the transition of the game state and the transition of the display mode are performed in separate games.

<Number of games management process>
The number-of-games management process executed in step S1601 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuous games in the AT mode, VB mode, and special zone is counted, and the number of continuous games in these display modes becomes 0. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

In the game number management process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is a specific number. As already explained, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets from 1 to 3, and in step S1701, it is determined whether or not the number of bets is 3 as the specific number. If the bet is not 3 bet, the game number management process is terminated. In other words, the number of omen mode games is not counted in 1-bet or 2-bet games. Note that the counting may be performed regardless of the number of bets.

If the current game is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, it is determined whether or not the bonus winning flag is set or the game is in a bonus state. If the determination in step S1702 is affirmative, in step S1703 the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the special zone flag for various display modes are cleared, after which the game count management process ends. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games in the AT mode or the like is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1703, that state is maintained.

Incidentally, in step S1703, while the AT mode flag, the VB mode flag, etc. are cleared, the AT notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after the end of the bonus, after going through a preparatory state such as an AT mode, these flags are used to notify the order of pressing for shifting the game state, so that it is possible to return to the game state before the bonus. On the other hand, when a bonus is won in a special zone, the special zone is terminated by the bonus win. Also, in step S1703, the AT mode winning flag and the like are not cleared. Therefore, when the AT mode or the like and the bonus are won at the same time, the winning notification based on these winning flags is performed after the bonus is finished.

If the determination in step S1702 is negative, it is determined in step S1704 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1705. If the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1704 (not in precursor mode), or after the process of step S1705 is executed, the number of continuous games in each mode is counted in steps S1706 to S1728. .

That is, in step S1706, it is determined whether the current display mode is the CZ mode. If it is the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1707 to perform processing for subtracting 1 from the CZ mode continuation counter, thereby decrementing the number of CZ mode continuation games. Then, in step S1708, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode continuation counter is 0. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1709, and the CZ mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1710. Upon receiving the CZ mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the CZ mode will end in the current game. After performing the process of step S1710, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the mode is not the CZ mode, the process advances to step S1711. In step S1711, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the AT mode. If it is in AT mode, the process advances to step S1712 to determine whether it is a specialized zone in AT mode. That is, in the case of shifting to the specialized zone at the start of the AT mode as in the SAT mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S1712. If it is in the special zone, the game number management process for the special zone is performed in steps S1725 to S1728. These processes will be described later.

If it is determined in step S1712 that the zone is not a specialized zone, in step S1713, the AT mode continuation counter is decremented by 1, thereby decrementing the number of AT mode continuation games. Then, in step S1714, it is determined whether or not the AT mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the AT mode flag is cleared in step S1715, and the AT notification flag is cleared in step S1716. After that, in step S1717, an AT mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. After performing the process of step S1717, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1711 that the mode is not the AT mode, the process advances to step S1718. In step S1718, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is the VB mode, the process advances to step S1719 to determine whether or not it is an additional specialized zone. If it is not the special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 in step S1720, thereby decrementing the number of VB mode continuation games. Then, in step S1721, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If not 0, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1722, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1723. After that, in step S1724, the VB mode end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81. FIG. Upon receiving the VB mode end command, the display control device 81 uses the auxiliary display section 65 or the like to notify that the VB mode will end in the current game. Such notification will be described later in detail. After performing the process of step S1724, the number-of-games management process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1719 that the zone is an additional special zone, the process proceeds to step S1725. As already explained, even if it is determined in step S1712 that the zone is the specialized zone in the AT mode, the process proceeds to step S1725. In step S1725, the special zone continuation game count is decremented by performing a process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter. Then, in step S1726, it is determined whether or not the special zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1727, and the special zone end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1728. In the display control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like notifies that the special zone ends in the current game. As such notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the special zone this time is notified. After performing the process of step S1728, the number-of-games management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1718 or step S1725, the game number management process is terminated.

<End determination processing>
Next, as the processing at the end of the bonus, the end determination processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the end determination process is a process executed in step S614 in the bonus state process (FIG. 27). In the termination determination process, it is determined whether or not the bonus termination condition is satisfied, and when the bonus is terminated, the AT mode or the like won after the bonus is won but before the bonus is won, or the AT mode or the like is won during the bonus. In addition to processing for notification, processing for adding the number of games such as AT mode is also performed.

That is, in step S1801, it is determined whether or not a minor winning combination has been established. During the 1st BB and 2nd BB bonuses, the 1st role in the BB is established with a high probability, and in some cases, the 2nd role in the BB, the 3rd role in the BB, the so-called rare roles such as strong cherry and strong watermelon are established ( Figure 28). When the 1st role is won during BB, the 1st minor role is mainly won and 9 medals are paid out, and in other cases, 3 to 9 medals are paid out or medals are missed. No payout occurs. Also, during the CB, any of the CB medium and small wins 1 to CB small and medium wins 4 is won, and even if you win any of them, the first small win is mainly established and the predetermined number (15) of medals will be paid out. Step S1801 is a process for determining whether or not a small winning combination that causes a medal payout has been established among the winning combinations during the bonus or CB.

If it is determined in step S1801 that a minor winning combination has been established, then in step S1802 processing is performed to subtract the current game payout number from the remaining payout number. If a negative determination is made in step S1801, or after the processing of step S1802 is executed, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the remaining number of payouts has become 0. If it is not 0, the end determination process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, after a bonus end command is set as an object to be output to the display control device 81 in step S1804, in steps S1805 to S1814, processing for notification of winning such as AT mode, AT mode, etc. Processing for adding the number of continuous games is performed.

In step S1805, it is determined whether or not the AT mode winning flag is set. If the AT mode win flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1806, the number of precursor games is set in step S1807, and the precursor command is set in step S1808. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, in the lottery process for the number of precursory games in step S1806, a lottery is performed in which the number of precursory games is 0 with a probability of 100%. That is, in step S1807, the number of premonitory games of 0 game is always set, and the success of the AT mode or the like is announced in the next game after the bonus ending game. After executing the process of step S1808, the end determination process is terminated.

If the AT mode winning flag is not set in step S1805, it is determined in step S1809 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode win flag is set, the process for the precursor mode of steps S1806 to S1808 is performed, and then the end determination process is terminated.

Note that when the bonus ends when the AT mode win flag is set, it means that the AT mode and the bonus are won at the same time, or the AT mode is won after the bonus is won but before the bonus is won, This is when the AT mode is won during the bonus, or when the bonus is won during the premonition mode of the AT mode winning notification. On the other hand, when the VB mode winning flag is set and the bonus ends, the VB mode and the bonus are won at the same time in the AT mode, or when the VB mode is won after the bonus is won but before the bonus is won. These are the case of winning, the case of winning the VB mode during the bonus, and the case of winning the bonus during the premonition mode of the notification of the winning of the VB mode.

If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1809, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, it is determined whether or not the AT mode addition flag is set. If the AT mode addition flag is not set, the end determination process is terminated. If the AT mode addition flag is set, AT mode addition game number lottery processing is performed in step S1811, AT mode game addition processing is performed in step S1812, and addition notification processing is performed in step S1813. , and an addition command is set in step S1814. The processes of steps S1811 to S1814 are the same as the processes of steps S1017 to S1020. After executing the process of step S1814, the end determination process ends.

As described above, on the main controller 101 side, (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the game state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) winning result. As a result of the processing for shifting the display mode based on , the pressing order notification effect is generated by the auxiliary display section 65, the game state is shifted so as to follow the transition of the display mode, and further, A pressing order bell winning can be generated by the pressing order notification performance by the auxiliary display section 65, and a large amount of medals can be expected to be obtained.

Here, when the pressing order replay or the pressing order bell win is performed, if the pressing order notification effect by the auxiliary display unit 65 (the pressing order notification effect by the display control device 81) is performed, in addition to the pressing order notification effect, the main control The instruction monitor 68 connected to the device 101 also informs of the pressing order. The configuration of this instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 51(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 51(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode of the instruction monitor 68 and the display contents.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the instruction monitor 68 is provided with eight display segments N1 to N8. Each of the display segments N1 to N8 has an individual light source composed of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light only one arbitrary display segment, Any combination of indicator segments can be illuminated. As a result, the instruction monitor 68 individually displays predetermined symbols (including alphabets and numbers). Since all of the individual light sources irradiate light of the same color, the display segments N1 to N8 display the same color.

Specifically, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments. The segment N7 is arranged so that at least the numbers "1" to "6" can be displayed. The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged laterally in the lower right portion of the region in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are provided. Therefore, the instruction monitor 68 can display at least "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

Note that the display segments N1 to N8 may have any shape and arrangement as long as the indication monitor 68 can individually display a plurality of patterns of symbols. A configuration using one segment, nine segments, or the like may also be used. Further, it is not essential that the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 be the same, and a configuration may be adopted in which the colors displayed in the respective display segments N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the configuration for controlling the lighting or extinguishing of each of the display segments N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of the light source is not essential. A segmented display may be constructed with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Further, instead of applying the segment display to each display area, the symbols may be displayed by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used for informing of the order of operations for pushing down. For example, as shown in FIG. 51(b), the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the order of "left"→"middle"→"right", which is advantageous for the player. In this case, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are illuminated and "1" is displayed. Further, when the winning mode advantageous to the player is obtained by performing the stop operation in the order of "right" → "left" → "middle" as the order of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first display segment N1, The second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are illuminated to display "5". That is, the numbers (symbols) displayed in the display segments N1 to N7 are associated one-to-one with the operating order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and are displayed in the display segments N1 to N7. By stopping the stop switches 42 to 44 based on the numbers (symbols), it is possible for the player to win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is a transition to an advantageous section, and a predetermined start condition including a notification condition in which an AT mode winning notification is performed and an AT notification flag is set, etc. is established, the light is lit in the game in which the start condition is established. Also, when the AT mode or SAT mode ends and the advantageous section shifts to the normal section, the light is turned off.

In other words, the navigation state (AT mode, SAT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation order of the push order bell and the push order replay can be easily reported to the player in an advantageous manner to facilitate winning, and the navigation state can be activated. A chance state (CZ mode, first BB, high probability mode) that makes it easier to win the transition lottery, or a winning state that has won the lottery but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. (Winning mode) is defined as an advantageous interval (specific game state, specific mode), and the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated during the specific interval in which the benefits of the push order notification can be obtained in the advantageous interval. , a section indicator (specific notification means) that is turned off during a normal section that is not an advantageous section or during a non-specific section that is an advantageous section but is not a specific section.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order display and the eighth display segment N8 as the section display displays the number of payouts on the game panel 25. It is arranged near the side of the display unit 62 . That is, the instruction monitor 68 is arranged above the stop switches 42 to 44 and the like operated by the player. is not placed on the decorative panel that is Therefore, it can be said that the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand or the like that operates the stop switches 42 to 44, and is arranged at a position where the player can easily visually recognize it. In addition, since it is arranged near the number-of-payouts display section 62, which is easy for the player who progresses the game to win medals, it can be said that overlooking by the player is suppressed.

Furthermore, in the instruction monitor 68, the eighth display segment N8 in particular has a brightness higher than the brightness of the surrounding display portions (for example, the payout number display portion 62 and the backlight of the game panel 25). The brightness of the corresponding LED is determined so that the brightness is twice the brightness of the surrounding display. Therefore, even when both the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display units are under light emission control (when they are in a lighting state), the eighth display segment N8 is conspicuous. ing. Regarding the illuminance toward the front of the game machine, the 8th display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the game machine than the surrounding display unit (more specifically, the illuminance toward the front of the game machine is 2/2 of the illuminance of the surrounding display unit). The illuminance of the corresponding LED is determined so that the illuminance is doubled). With such a configuration as well, the visibility of the eighth display segment N8 is improved, and overlooking when the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state is suppressed.

The section display first process and the section display second process will be described below as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

<Section display first process>
First, the section display first process will be described with reference to FIG. The first section display process is a process executed in step S316 in the lottery process (FIG. 16), in which the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and This is performed after the display mode transition lottery, etc. (lottery result handling process) is performed.

In step S1901, it is determined whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as the interval display is being displayed, more specifically, whether or not the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, the case where the eighth display segment N8 is being lit indicates the case in which, among the advantageous sections, the specific section satisfies at least the notification condition that the push sequence notification can occur. If a negative determination is made in step S1901 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous section flag is a flag that is set in the advantageous section transition lottery process (FIG. 32) when the lottery for transition to the advantageous section is won. If the advantageous section flag has been set, it is determined in step S1903 whether or not the advantageous section winning game flag has been set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify the winning game. If the advantageous section winning game flag is set, a process of clearing the advantageous section winning game flag is executed in step S1904. If the advantageous section winning game flag is not set in step S1903, the process proceeds to step S1905.

In step S1905, it is determined whether or not the counting of the number of games in the advantageous interval, more specifically, the counting of the number of advantageous interval games AG in the various counter areas 106e has started. If the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG has not started, processing for starting the measurement of the number of games in the advantageous interval AG is performed in step S1906. The number of games in the advantageous interval AG corresponds to grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous interval, and a process of adding one to each game in the advantageous interval is executed.

If it is determined in step S1905 that the measurement has already started, or if the process of step S1906 has been executed, the process advances to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, when the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, the pushing order notification when the pushing winning role is won becomes possible, and the above notification conditions are satisfied. . If it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is set, then in step S1908 the eighth display segment N8 is turned on to start displaying the section display. In addition, in the main controller 101, when starting to display the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator in the lighting state, a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound "Gago!") is emitted from the speaker 64. A command for sound output is output to the display control device 81 so that sound) is output. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so as to emit the predetermined sound effect based on the sound output command. Incidentally, when the display of the eighth display segment N8 is started, an effect may be generated in the auxiliary display section 65 or another display section. The configuration may be such that the display control device 81 controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like so that the corresponding effect is performed.

If it is determined in step S1901 that the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is being displayed, then in step S1909 processing is executed to continue the display during the advantageous section. Specifically, in step S1909, processing is performed to continue the state in which the eighth display segment N8 is in the lighting state. That is, the processing for ending the display of the section indicator is not performed in the first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the advantageous section flag is not set, or if the game is a winning game even if the advantageous section flag is set (after executing the processing of step S1904), the winning game Even if it is not, if the situation does not allow the pressing order notification to occur (if it is determined in step S1907 that the AT notification flag is not set), the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio first counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio first counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the pressing order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal section and the non-specific section.

After executing the display start processing of the section indicator in step S1908 and after executing the display continuation processing in step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1911. In step S1911, a process of adding 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which the push order notification can occur, that is, the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the process of step S1910 or step S1911, the role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1912. In this process, the value of the second role ratio counter is divided by the added value (total number of games) of the first role ratio counter and the second role ratio counter. That is, the role ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the ratio of the number of games in which the pressing order notification can occur among the total number of games. Then, in step S1913, a process for displaying the calculation processing result of step S1912 on the role ratio monitor 77 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has a plurality of 7-segment display sections each composed of 7 segments for display. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as seven-segment display sections. there is The display segments in the first display portion 77a to the fifth display portion 77e have individual light sources composed of LEDs, similarly to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and these individual light sources are controlled on and off. By doing so, only one arbitrary display segment can be lit, and an arbitrary combination of display segments can be lit. As a result, the role ratio monitor 77 can individually display a predetermined symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 can display a 5-digit number. there is

In step S1913, the result of the arithmetic processing in step S1912 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and each display portion 77a to 77e in the role ratio monitor 77 is displayed so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Control the display. Specifically, out of the total number of games, the ratio of the number of games in which the push order notification can occur is a number smaller than 1, such as "0.5012", and up to four decimal places. A number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 . After executing the process of step S1913, the section display first process ends.

It should be noted that the display control of the role ratio monitor 77 may be performed after performing the processing of rounding off the fifth digit below the decimal point in the arithmetic processing of step S1912. Further, since the first display portion 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display portion 77a may be omitted, or the first display portion 77a may be printed. A configuration may be adopted in which "0" is always displayed by . A decimal point may be displayed by printing or the like between the first display portion 77a and the second display portion 77b.

<Second section display processing>
Next, the section display second processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already explained, the second section display process is a process that is executed in step S415 of the reel control process. etc. (processing for dealing with winning results) is performed.

In step S2001, it is determined whether or not the advantageous section flag is set. If it is not set, the section display second process is terminated. If the advantageous interval flag is set, in step S2002, a process of counting the number of games during the advantageous interval is executed. Specifically, a process of adding 1 to the number of games in the advantageous section AG is performed. After executing the process of step S2002, in step S2003, the process of updating the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM provided in the various counter areas 106e is executed. The advantageous interval increase/decrease number ZM is a counter for the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the advantageous interval (the difference between the number of medals betted and the number of medals paid out in each game in the advantageous interval). In S2003, based on the winning result of the current game (previous winning result handling process and payout determination process), the number of medals increased or decreased (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of bets in the current game) is grasped. Then, a process of adding the medal increase/decrease number to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM is performed. For example, if the current game is a 3-bet game and nine medals are paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is +6, and in step S2003, +6 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM. If the current game is a 3-bet game and medals are not paid out, the medal increase/decrease number is -3, and in step S2003, -3 is added to the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM.

In the present embodiment, when the number of increased/decreased medals ZM in the advantageous section becomes negative when calculating the number of increased/decreased medals in the update process, the increased/decreased number of medals ZM in the advantageous section is set to 0. In other words, when the decrease amount is negative, the negative amount is not grasped, and the increase medal decrease number after becoming positive is grasped.

After executing the processing of step S2003, the remaining number of games management processing is executed in step S2004, and the remaining number management processing is executed in the following step S2005. The number-of-remaining-games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section reaches the upper limit number of games based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode. The number-of-remaining-numbers management process is a process for managing whether or not the number of remaining games in the current number of remaining games has reached the upper limit number of increases in the advantageous section based on the number of remaining games in the AT mode.

Regarding the number-of-remaining-games management process, specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 54, first, in step S2101, the number of predictive games G1 is grasped. The number of precursor games G1 indicates the number of remaining precursor mode games, for example, when the current state is the precursor mode in the advantageous section, and is decremented by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2102, the CZ mode continuation count G2 is grasped. The CZ mode continuation count G2 represents the number of remaining CZ mode games, for example, when the current state is the CZ mode in the advantageous zone, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2103, the AT mode continuation count G3 is grasped. The AT mode continuation number G3 represents the number of remaining AT mode games, for example, when the current state is the AT mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2104, the VB mode continuation count G4 is grasped. The VB mode continuation number G4 represents the number of remaining VB mode games, for example, when the current state is the VB mode in the advantageous section, and is subtracted by 1 for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). . In step S2105, the specialized zone continuation number G5 is grasped. The specialized zone continuation number G5 represents the number of games remaining in the specialized zone, for example, when the current status is the specialized zone in the advantageous section, and is set by one for each game in the game number management process (FIG. 49). subtracted. In step S2106, the number of remaining BB games G6 is grasped. The number of remaining BB games G6 indicates the number of remaining BB mode games, for example, when the current state is the BB mode (bonus state) in the advantageous section, and is performed each time the game number management process (FIG. 49) is started. Then, it is decremented by 1 in a subtraction process (not shown) on condition that the BB mode is on.

Here, values of 0 or more may be input to these continuation numbers G1 to G6 even if the mode or zone does not correspond to the current state. Specifically, for example, in VB mode, specialized zone, or BB mode, counting the number of remaining games in AT mode is stopped. When a transition occurs, a value of 0 or more is input to the AT mode continuation count G2 and the continuation count of each mode.

In step S2107, a process of calculating the number of remaining games ZG in the advantageous section is performed by integrating G1 to G6 grasped in each process of steps S2101 to S2106. By performing such processing, it is possible to grasp how many games the advantageous section continues. In the subsequent step S2108, the number of games in the advantageous interval (the number of games in the advantageous interval AG) and the number of remaining games ZG are added to calculate the total number of games in the advantageous interval SG. Then, in step S2109, the number of empty games (the number of empty games that can be added, the number of remaining games) FG is calculated by subtracting the total number of games SG from the upper limit number of continuous games in the advantageous section, 1500G. process.

After the processing of step S2109 is performed, it is determined in step S2110 whether or not the number of empty games FG is greater than 0, that is, whether or not there is an empty game number and can be added. If the free game number FG is greater than 0, the remaining game number management process is terminated. On the other hand, if the free game number FG is 0 or less, the process of setting the first excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed in step S2111, and then the remaining game number management process is terminated. The first excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is specified that the first condition for forced termination of the advantageous section is satisfied.

In the remaining number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 55, first, in step S2201, the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM updated in step S2003 is grasped. In the following step S2202, the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG (step S2107) calculated in the remaining game management processing in step S2004 and the expected net increase in the number of games in the advantageous section stored in the ROM 105 (expected increase/decrease number KM), a process of calculating the expected number of remaining increase/decrease numbers NM that can be obtained in the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is executed. In the present embodiment, the expected increase/decrease number of sheets KM is the net increase in number of sheets (approximately +2.46 ) is used. That is, for example, if the number of games remaining in the advantageous section ZG is 500 games, the expected remaining increase/decrease number of cards NM is 500 games×2.46 cards=1230 cards.

In step S2203, based on the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM grasped in step S2201 and the expected remaining increase/decrease number NM calculated in step S2202, the current number of remaining games in the advantageous section is taken into consideration to obtain during the current advantageous section. A process of calculating the number of sheets expected to increase or decrease (total increase/decrease expected number of sheets SM) is performed. Then, in step S2204, a process of calculating the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased is performed. The processing of step S2204 corresponds to the processing of calculating the number of vacant games FG that can be added in step S2108 in the number-of-remaining-games management processing. The process of step S2204 predicts in advance that the advantageous section will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the subsequent game. It is a process to That is, in step S2204, the total expected increase/decrease number of sheets SM calculated in step S2203 is subtracted from 2400 sheets, which is the upper limit increase in the advantageous section.

In step S2205, based on the result of processing in step S2204, it is determined whether or not the number of blank sheets FM that can be increased becomes 0 or less, and the process will be forcibly terminated under the second forced termination condition in the future. If the number of empty sheets FM is equal to or greater than 1, it is determined that the number of increments has not reached the upper limit, and the remaining number management processing is terminated. If the empty number FM is 0 or less, the process advances to step S2206 to set the second excess flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then the remaining number management process ends. The second excess flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that the second forced termination condition can be satisfied thereafter.

By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, in this embodiment, even if a specific role is won during the advantageous section, the execution of the game number addition lottery etc. during the AT mode is limited. . More specifically, for example, in step S1014 or step S1201 AT mode game number addition lottery process, if the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, the lottery process is executed. Restricted, no additional winnings (or even if winning, additional 0 games will be added). As a result, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the advantageous section will continue for the upper limit number of games or more by adding the game to the amount that cannot be continued.

It should be noted that once the first excess flag and the second excess flag are set, the remaining game number management process may not be executed in the current advantageous section.

Returning to the description of the second section display process (FIG. 53), after executing the process of step S2005, in step S2006, it is determined whether or not the number of games in the advantageous section AG has reached the upper limit number of games of 1500, or It is determined whether or not the advantageous section increase/decrease number ZM has reached 2400 or more, which is the upper limit increase number. If any of these forced termination conditions are met, the number of games in the advantageous section AG and the number of increased/decreased number of advantageous section games ZM are cleared to 0 in step S2007. In the subsequent step S2008, a process of ending the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is performed. Then, in step S2009, after performing processing for initializing parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous section, the section display second processing ends.

More specifically, the data initialization process in step S2009 is a process of returning the flags and counters set upon transition to the current advantageous section and the flags and counters set during the current advantageous section to their initial values. . For example, a CZ mode winning flag, an AT mode winning flag, or the like is set when transitioning to an advantageous section, an AT mode winning flag is set during the CZ mode, or a VB mode winning flag is set during the AT mode, If the flag remains set until this initialization process, these winning flags are cleared. Also, in the initialization processing, if the AT notification flag, AT mode flag, VB mode flag, special zone flag, etc. are set, these flags are also cleared. Furthermore, if the omen counter, the counter for the number of continuous games in the CZ mode, the AT mode, etc. is greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables and parameters affecting the performance related to the push order notification regarding the advantageous section as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and clears the RAM for such variables and parameters. This is the process of performing

If it is determined in step S2006 that the number of games in the advantageous section AG has not reached the upper limit value, or if it is determined that the number of increase/decrease numbers in the advantageous section ZM has not reached the upper limit increase number, the process advances to step S2010 to normally end the advantageous section. Determine whether the conditions are met. More specifically, none of the CZ mode winning flag, the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag, and the AT mode flag are set, and the number of remaining continuous games including the mode higher than the CZ mode is 0. determine whether or not If none of the CZ mode winning flag, CZ mode flag, AT mode winning flag, and AT mode flag are set, the process advances to step S2007, and after performing the advantageous section end processing of steps S2007 to S2009, , the section display second processing ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2010, the section display second process is terminated. In this case, the lighting display of the section indicator (the eighth display segment N8) continues.

<Regarding the display of the push order indicator and section indicator and the progress of the game>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous section and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator will be described with reference to FIG.

In the present slot machine 10, as shown in FIG. 56, the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is extinguished (not lit) in the normal section which is not the advantageous section. In this normal section, push order notification is not performed. In other words, it can be said that the normal section is a section that does not have such an instruction function as opposed to the advantageous section that has an instruction function such as notification of the pressing order. A situation where the display mode is the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal section.

In the normal section, for example, if you win a lottery to move to the advantageous section by winning a weak watermelon role, etc., the number of games executed in the advantageous section from the next game of the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is established (Advantageous section game counting of number AG) is started. Then, when the lottery for shifting to the AT mode is won in the advantageous section, and the winning notification and the AT notification flag are set, etc., when the push order notification can occur, the condition for starting the display of the section indicator is set. The eighth display segment N8 lights up assuming that it has been established.

After that, under the condition that the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated, the push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, as described above, the pressing order information (“1” to “6”) is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. You can understand the order. In the push order notification, the display of the push order information starts when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and the display ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If this game is not the final game of the advantageous section, only the display of the pushing order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 is terminated when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the eighth display is displayed. The display of the advantageous section by the segment N8 is continued. Then, when the pushing order is won again in the next game and thereafter, the pushing order information corresponding to the pushing order is displayed in the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of consecutive games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit, or the number of increased medals in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit increase number, etc., when the final game of the advantageous section is reached, the eighth display segment N8 is also turned off to notify the advantageous section. ends. In the present embodiment, the eighth display segment N8 is turned off at the timing when the payout of medals is finished in the final game of the advantageous section (by the second section display process which is the process after the payout determination process). If medals are not paid out in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 is extinguished when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game was the last game in the advantageous section.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous interval is counted from the game following the game in which the lottery for transition to the advantageous interval has been won, while the pressing order is announced only during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is illuminated. Occur. In other words, even if it is an advantageous section, in a section (non-specific section) where the eighth display segment N8 is turned off, the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by confirming whether or not the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is lit, it is possible to enjoy at least the benefits of the pushing order notification among the advantageous sections (specific section, substantial increase section). can be clearly understood. By doing so, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between a player who finishes the game without knowing that the situation is such that he/she can enjoy the benefits of the pushing order notification and a succeeding player who takes a seat after that. can be made In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the pressing order notification does not occur, so the game can be gracefully ended.

In addition, in the slot machine 10, regarding the game property of changing the degree of advantage by informing of the pressing order, especially regarding the lottery for transition to the advantageous section, the advantage is configured so that there is no difference in the degree of advantage due to the set value. Situations such as the AT mode where push order notification can occur are included in the advantageous section, and push order notification does not occur not only in situations where the section display is not displayed in the advantageous section, but also in the normal section. In other words, in the game in which the benefits of the pressing order information are to be obtained, there is no difference in the degree of advantage depending on the set value for the lottery for transition to the advantageous section as the first stage. By doing so, the slot machine 10 provides a uniform advantage level for each gaming table (set value) and each game (situation), eliminates advantage/disadvantage between players, and obtains a privilege by aiming for a pattern. It is possible to realize a well-balanced game machine while fully enjoying the original game property and the relationship with the game property by the accompanying pushing order notification.

<Processing related to notification effects on the sub side>
Next, as (4) processing related to notification effect on the sub side, processing for various notifications performed by the display control device 81 on the sub side will be described. As processing for various notifications, effect setting processing that is executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the effect setting process, first, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main controller 101. FIG. If a new command has been received, processing for storing the received command in RAM 183 is executed in step S2302. A command storage area is provided in the RAM 183, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of individually storing a plurality of commands and reading out from previously stored commands.

If a negative determination is made in step S2301, or if the process of step S2302 has been executed, it is determined in step S2303 whether or not the newly received command was a command at the time of betting. A bet time command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the bet operation being performed, and in addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal processing, mode transition notification processing (see FIG. 45) includes an AT mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, a bonus winning notification command, and the like. In the case of these bet time commands, a bet time effect setting process is executed in step S2304.

If a negative determination is made in step S2303, or if the process of step S2304 has been executed, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not the newly received command was the start command. The command at the start is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery process, the first to There are precursor commands and additional commands set in the third special combination process (FIGS. 33 to 36), push order notification commands set in the push order process (FIG. 47), and the like. In the case of these start time commands, a start time effect setting process is executed in step S2306.

If a negative determination is made in step S2305, or if the process of step S2306 has been executed, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the newly received command was a stop operation command. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. This is a stop instruction command set in . In the case of the stop instruction command as the command at each stop operation, at step S2308, effect setting processing at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2307, or if the processing of step S2308 has been executed, it is determined in step S2309 whether or not the newly received command is a full stop command. The all-stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, and is a winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to commands, AT mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, AT mode end command, VB mode end command, special zone end command, third There are a 1 fixed RT start command, a 2nd fixed RT start command, and the like. In the case of these all-stop commands, a full-stop effect setting process is executed in step S2310.

If a negative determination is made in step S2309, or after the processing of step S2310 has been executed, operation corresponding processing is executed in step S2311. The operation corresponding process is a process when the operation means for presentation connected to the display control device 81 is operated. The operation corresponding processing will be described later in detail. After executing the process of step S2311, in step S2312, after executing other processes, the effect setting process is terminated. In step S2312, setting effects based on commands from the main controller 101 other than when betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59, etc.), and connecting without going through the main controller 101 Based on the signal from the detected sensor (effect switch detection sensor, etc.), the setting of the effect, the setting for error notification, etc. are performed.

Below, the effect setting process at the time of betting, the effect setting process at the time of start, the effect setting process at the time of each stop operation, and the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described. Note that each effect setting process will be described with reference to schematic diagrams of display effects in FIGS. 66 to 77 and the like.

<Production setting processing at the time of betting>
The betting effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode start command is included in the betting time command received this time. When the CZ mode start command is included, in step S2402, processing for setting the CZ mode start effect is performed. In the CZ mode start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "chance zone start", and displays that the transition display mode is in a situation where it is easy to win the AT mode transition lottery (for example, predetermined character display). In addition, in the CZ mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a loud male voice saying "It's a chance!") is emitted.

If the CZ mode start command is not included in step S2401, it is determined in step S2403 whether or not the AT mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the AT mode winning notification command is included, in step S2404, the process of setting the AT mode winning notification effect is performed. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT confirmed". In addition, in the AT mode winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "I did it!") is emitted.

If the AT mode winning notification command is not included in step S2403, it is determined in step S2405 whether or not the VB mode winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S2406, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 67(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "V-BONUS confirmed". In addition, in the VB mode winning notification presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "super lucky!") is emitted.

If the VB mode winning notification command is not included in step S2405, it is determined in step S2407 whether or not the bonus winning notification command is included as the betting command received this time. When the bonus winning notification command is included, in step S2408, a process of setting a bonus winning notification effect is performed. In the bonus winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the text "You did it! Bonus confirmed". In addition, in the bonus winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "I did it!") is emitted.

If the bonus winning notification command is not included in step S2407, it is determined in step S2409 whether or not the specialized zone winning notification command is included as the betting time command received this time. If the special zone winning notification command is included, in step S2410, processing for setting the special zone winning notification effect is performed. In the special zone winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays characters such as "Ride on!". In addition, in the special zone winning notification effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a loud, ecstatic male voice, "Norinori!") is emitted.

After any one of steps S2402, S2404, S2406, S2408 and S2410 is executed, or when a negative determination is made in step S2409, in step S2411, other effects at the time of betting are set. , the effect setting process is terminated. In the process of step S2411, for example, in response to the reception of the bet command, the lamps around (or inside) the credit input switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the bet number are turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted. Alternatively, for example, processing for returning from the demo mode in which one condition is that no game has been played for a predetermined time, or lighting a lamp around the start lever 41 to notify that the operation is valid. processing, etc.

<Start effect setting processing>
Next, the start-time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2501, display mode setting processing is performed. In this processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, and the auxiliary display is performed in the corresponding display mode. It is set so that the display effect of the part 65 is performed. Specifically, in the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side, an area for setting an AT mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag is provided as a flag for grasping the display mode. A corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode and cleared at the end. In step S2501, by grasping these various mode flags, the current display mode is specified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In subsequent step S2502, processing for pending shift is executed. The pending shift process is a process for displaying pending information regarding the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described later in detail.

In step S2503, based on the received lottery result command, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the game to be started this time is the first prize. In the case of winning the pushing order, in step S2504, the pushing order notification process is performed. Here, the pressing order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the pressing order notification command is included in the start time command received this time. If the pressing order notification command is not included, the main pressing order notification processing is terminated. If the pressing order notification command is included, the process advances to step S2602.

In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the current lottery results are the first promotion replays 1-4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, in step S2603, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the third replay win is established, and then the pressing order notification processing is performed. exit.

If it is determined in step S2602 that the first promotion replays 1-4 are not won, it is determined in step S2604 whether or not the current lottery result is drop replays 1-3. In the case of falling replays 1 to 3, the process advances to step S2605 to control the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like so as to notify the pressing order that the first replay win is established, and then terminate the pressing order notification process. do.

If it is determined in step S2604 that the replays are not fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2606 whether or not the current lottery results are the second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is the second promotion replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect or the specialized zone winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when setting the VB mode winning notification effect in step S2404 and the special zone winning notification effect in step S2408, the various flag storage areas 183a of the RAM 183 are notified that the VB winning or the special zone winning has been announced. set a flag. The alerted flag is cleared upon transition to the VB mode or specialized zone. Then, in step S2607, the presence or absence of the notified flag may be determined. If the VB mode or special zone winning announcement has been completed, in step S2608, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to announce the pressing order in which the 4th and 5th regame winnings are established. , terminates the pressing order notification process. If the notification of winning in the VB mode or the special zone has not been completed, the process advances to step S2605 to notify the pressing order for the first regame winning, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2606 that it is not the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2609 whether or not the current lottery result is BAR replay. In the case of BAR replay, it is determined in step S2610 whether or not the special zone winning notification effect has been executed. If it has already been announced that the special zone has been won, in step S2611, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the seventh regame win is established, and then the push order notification process is executed. finish. If the special zone winning notification has not been completed, the process advances to step S2603 to perform the pressing order notification for the third re-game winning prize, and then terminate the pressing order notification process.

If it is determined in step S2609 that it is not a BAR replay, it is determined in step S2612 whether or not the current lottery result is Bell. If the bell is won, in step S2613, the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like is controlled so as to notify the pressing order that the bell wins as the first minor combination, and then the pressing order notification processing is terminated. .

If a negative determination is made in step S2612, it is determined in step S2614 whether or not the current lottery result is transition replay. If the transition replay is won, the special notification execution process is executed in step S2615, and then the push order notification process is terminated. In the special notification execution processing, a push order notification effect for establishing the 11th regame winning prize or the 12th regame winning prize is performed based on the shift replay winning. If a negative determination is made in step S2614, the pressing order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start (FIG. 59), if it is determined in step S2503 that the push-up role is not won, it is determined in step S2505 whether or not the transition opportunity role is won. If the transition opportunity is won, a process for notification of the transition opportunity is performed in step S2506. The transition trigger notification process will be described later in detail.

If a negative determination is made in step S2505, or after the processing of step S2504 or step S2506 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2507. In step S2507, it is determined whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. When the add-on command is received, in step S2508, the process of setting the add-on effect in advance is performed so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed at the time of stop. As the additional effect, for example, as shown in FIGS. 66(a) to 66(c), the auxiliary display section 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of additional games. In addition, in the additional effect, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted.

Details of the processing for setting the additional effect in step S2508 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2701, a process of grasping the number of added games to be notified is performed based on the added command received this time. In the following step S2702, processing for grasping notification timing is executed. The notification timing is the timing for executing the additional effect, and the timing is determined by the processing (additional notification processing) on the side of the main controller 101 described above. Information on the determined timing is set in the above-mentioned add-on command and output. Therefore, on the side of the display control device 81, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the addition effect should be executed by reading the addition command. As the notification timing, a game in which an additional effect should be executed and a timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 are set.

After grasping the notification timing in step S2702, it is determined in step S2703 whether or not the result of grasping in step S2702 is that an additional effect is to be performed in the current game. The case where the addition notification is not performed in the current game is the case where the subsequent addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting processing of the addition effect is finished as it is. If an additional effect is to be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not any of the reels is stopped and ON as the execution timing of the additional effect in the current game. If it is the stop ON time, in step S2705, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is operated to stop ON. Specifically, a process of setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the additional effect. Further, in step S2705, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in the predetermined effect data setting area. I do. When the CPU 181 grasps that the additional performance is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area so that the additional performance is performed.

If a negative determination is made in step S2704, it is determined in step S2706 whether or not the stop OFF operation of the first reel or the second reel has been performed. If these reels are to be stopped and turned OFF, in step S2707, the target reel for which the additional effect is to be generated is set so that the additional effect is generated when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation flag or the second reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 181 to comprehend the timing of generating the additional effect. In step S2707 as well, the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is read out from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

When a negative determination is made in step S2706, in step S2708, setting is made so that this additional effect is generated when all the reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped and turned OFF). Specifically, a process of setting a third reel stop OFF operation flag in the various flag storage area 183a is performed. Also, in step S2708, temporary storage processing of effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games is performed. After executing the processing of step S2705, step S2707 or step S2708, the setting processing of the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the description of the effect setting process at the start, when the addition command is not received in step S2507, or after the process of step S2508 is executed, the effect setting process during bonus is executed in step S2509. In the bonus mid-effect setting process, a process for performing effects for the first BB state and the second BB state by the auxiliary display section 65 or the like is executed. In this case, the effects for the first BB state and the effects for the second BB state are different to such an extent that the player can distinguish between them, so that the player can clearly grasp which BB state it is. there is

In the following step S2510, continuous effect setting processing is executed. The continuous effect setting process will be described later in detail. Thereafter, in step S2511, after setting other effects at start, the process for setting effects at start ends. In the process of step S2511, for example, an effect indicating the lottery result is set corresponding to the start of the game, or the lamp around the start lever 41 is extinguished to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Production setting processing at each stop operation>
Next, the effect setting processing at the time of stop operation performed in step S2308 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2801, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2802 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned on is set as the current game effect. If not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2803 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop ON operation effect. If it is not the stop ON operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is the stop ON operation of the target reel, in step S2804, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the auxiliary display section 65 An additional production will occur. Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

Further, for example, if the current game is a winning push order and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel stops based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production that shows the reel that becomes. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, the display that the first reel is to be operated is displayed as shown in FIG. 46(a). . Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 46(b) is displayed. change in performance. Further, if two reels are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display is made in which the second reel is to be stopped as shown in FIG. When the reels are stopped, the display changes to the display indicating that the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 46(c)).

If a negative determination is made in step S2801, the process advances to step S2805 to determine whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command output from the main controller 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of the reels is finished.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2805, the process advances to step S2806 to determine whether or not an effect that occurs when the reels are stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect of the current game. If it is not set, the setting process is terminated. If it is set, it is determined in step S2807 whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is the stop operation of the reel that is the target of the set stop OFF operation effect. If it is not the stop OFF operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. In the case of the stop OFF operation of the target reel, in step S2808, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the effect at the time of the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process ends.

For example, when an additional effect is set as the present stop OFF operation effect, as shown in FIG. At the timing when the hand is released, an additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display section 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect. If a negative determination is made in step S2805, the effect setting process is terminated.

<Production setting processing at all stop time>
Next, the effect setting process at the time of all stop will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the CZ mode end command is included, in step S2902, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so that the CZ mode end effect is performed. In the CZ mode end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display portion 65 displays characters "Chance Zone End". In addition, in the CZ mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a sound effect corresponding to the end of the CZ mode (for example, a loud male voice saying "More diligence!"). The ending effect when the continuous effect is performed in the CZ mode will be described in detail later.

If the CZ mode end command is not included in step S2901, it is determined in step S2903 whether or not the AT mode start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the AT mode start command is included, in step S2904, a process of setting the AT mode start effect is performed. In the AT mode start presentation, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "AT start!! LV.1". In addition, in the AT mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice, "Let's go!") is emitted.

Incidentally, the display of "LV.1" in the AT mode start effect corresponds to the AT mode level. That is, the AT mode started this time is LV. This is a display indicating the 1 mode. When the AT mode level is LV. When the mode is promoted to the 2nd mode (when the promotion command is received), the characters "LV.2" are displayed on the auxiliary display section 65 as promotion effects. Also, if the AT mode level is LV. When promoted to 3 mode, the text "LV.3" is displayed, and LV. When promoted to 4 mode, the characters "LV.4" are displayed.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2903, it is determined in step S2905 whether or not the AT mode end command is included as the currently received stopping command. When the AT mode end command is included, in step S2906, processing for setting AT mode end effect is performed. In the AT mode ending effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 68(b), the characters "AT END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the current AT mode (including VB mode and special zone) is displayed. , and the total number of payouts for the current AT mode (including VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the AT mode termination presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "see you later" in a high-pitched voice of a woman) is emitted.

If the AT mode end command is not included in step S2905, it is determined in step S2907 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. When the VB mode start command is included, in step S2908, processing for setting the VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "777 Lucky!!". In addition, in the VB mode start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices "bonus start!!") is emitted.

If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2907, it is determined in step S2909 whether or not the VB mode end command is included in the currently received stop command. If the VB mode end command is included, in step S2910, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 69(b), the characters "V-BONUS END" are displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the AT mode continuation game at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. number of continuous games (including VB mode and special zone) and the total payout number of AT mode (including VB mode, special zone and bonus) at the end of the current VB mode. In addition, in the VB mode end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, male and female voices saying "It's still going on") is emitted.

If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2909, it is determined in step S2911 whether or not the special zone start command is included in the currently received stop command. When the special zone start command is included, in step S2912, processing for setting the special zone start effect is performed. In the specialized zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 70(a), the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Add Challenge!!" A character is displayed to indicate that In addition, in the special zone start presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, "Let's go" in a boy's voice) is emitted.

If the special zone start command is not included in step S2911, it is determined in step S2913 whether or not the special zone end command is included in the currently received stopping command. When the special zone end command is included, in step S2914, processing for setting the special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end presentation, for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays the total number of games added in the special zone this time. In addition, in the special zone end presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound “kyukyukyukyuuuin!”) is emitted. It is preferable to change the display contents of the auxiliary display section 65 and the sound effects emitted from the speaker 64 according to the total number of additional games.

If the special zone end command is not included in step S2913, it is determined in step S2915 whether or not the bonus end command is included in the currently received stop command. When the bonus end command is included, in step S2916, processing for setting the bonus end effect is performed. In the bonus end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the total number of payouts obtained during the bonus, and if the bonus is shifted to AT mode, VB mode, or special zone, AT mode ( Display the total number of payouts for VB mode, special zone, and bonus). In addition, in the bonus end effect, a character or the like suggesting these contents is performed according to the suitability of the AT mode and the number of additional games. Incidentally, the processing for setting the bonus ending effect in step S2916 will be described later in detail.

After executing any of steps S2902, S2904, S2906, S2908, S2910, S2912, S2914, and S2916, or after making a negative determination in step S2915, the process proceeds to step S2917. In step S2917, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled so as to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already explained, the setting of the additional effect is performed at step S2508 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the additional effect (FIG. 61), when the generation timing of the additional effect of this time is set at the time of full stop, as shown in FIG. , 32R are stopped, an additional effect is generated on the auxiliary display portion 65. - 特許庁Also, in this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the added effect.

After that, in step S2918, after setting other effects at the time of stop, the main effect setting process is terminated. In step S2918, for example, control is performed so that the upper lamp 63 is lit in a color corresponding to the winning combination, sound effect corresponding to the payout number of the winning combination is emitted from the speaker 64, or control is performed during replay. A sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet is emitted from the speaker 64.例文帳に追加

As described above, based on various commands from the main controller 101, the display control device 81 performs various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode, and the notification is performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like. In addition, on the display control device 81 side, in addition to notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Production processing during various games>
In this embodiment, continuous effects performed in the sign mode are provided as effects during various games. A continuous effect is a effect that makes the player expect an advantageous result (winning a bonus, CZ mode, AT mode, VB mode, etc.), and the game is played a plurality of times (10 times in this embodiment). This is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which a final notification is made as to whether or not the advantageous result was obtained in the final game.

<Processing for continuous production>
An outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 77. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 71, the continuous effect is set such that related effects are performed over 10 games as a plurality of games. In this embodiment, an effect is set in which a friendly character fights an enemy character. Then, as a final notification notified in the final game, when a victory effect in which a friendly character wins is performed, it is indicated that the game result that triggered the continuous effect was an advantageous result for the player. When a defeat effect in which the ally character is defeated (the enemy character wins) is performed, a non-advantageous result indicating that the game result that triggered the continuous effect was not an advantageous result for the player. The result will be notified.

In details of the continuous effect, in the 1st to 3rd games, an effect of selecting an enemy character to fight against an ally character is performed, and in the 4th to 6th games, a weapon selection effect is performed in which the ally character selects a weapon to be used. is performed, and in the seventh to ninth games, a battle effect is performed in which friendly characters and enemy characters attack each other. A result notification effect is performed in which one of the above is notified.

In the enemy character selection effect, in the first game, for example, as shown in FIG. 72(a), a character option notification effect in which a plurality of enemy character options are displayed is performed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In this embodiment, as options for the enemy character, "zombie" as the first option, "ninja" as the second option, and "tank" as the third option are set. Depending on whether the selection is made, the probability of which of the final game announcement, the advantageous result announcement and the non-advantageous result announcement, will be announced differs. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 73, the probability of being notified of an advantageous result is highest when "zombie" is selected, and the probability of being notified of an advantageous result is lower in the order of "ninja" and "tank". is set to

As described above, when the character option notification effect is performed in the first game, for example, on the display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, the display areas displaying the respective options are divided and displayed. Each display area is separately highlighted (for example, blinking) at a predetermined cycle.

In the second game, as shown in FIG. 72(a), in the character selection notification effect, the character selection operation effect of the effect switch 66 (in FIG. 72(a), the character imitating the effect switch 66 and the "PUSH" character display) occurs. In this case, based on the fact that the production switch 66 is operated, the switching of the above-described highlighting stops while the display area corresponding to the enemy character to be fought this time is highlighted. In other words, when the effect switch 66 is operated in the second game, it is determined which character has been selected as the current enemy character. Note that the switching cycle (predetermined cycle) of highlighting is set as a relatively short cycle (for example, 0.5 sec per round). Therefore, when the display area highlighted at the timing when the effect switch 66 is operated by the player is different from the display area corresponding to the current enemy character, the display area corresponding to the current enemy character is different. Even if the switching of the highlighting is stopped after the switching of the highlighting is performed, it is difficult to cause a sense of incongruity.

After that, in the third game, a notification effect for the selected character is performed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 73(a1) to 73(a3), the display area highlighted based on the operation in the second game is enlarged, and animation of the enemy character is displayed. . In this case, a sound effect (voice of each enemy character) corresponding to the enemy character is emitted from the speaker 64 .

As for the use weapon selection effect, in the fourth game, for example, as shown in FIG. 74(a), a weapon option notification effect showing a plurality of use weapon options is performed on the auxiliary display section 65. FIG. In this embodiment, as options for the weapon to be used, the first option is "machine gun", the second option is "knife", and the third option is "hammer". Depending on whether it is selected, the probability of which of the advantageous result notification and the non-advantageous result notification will be notified in the final game differs. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 75, the probability of obtaining an advantageous result notification is highest when "machine gun" is selected, and the probability of obtaining an advantageous result notification decreases in the order of "knife" and "hammer". is set to

As described above, when the weapon option notification effect is performed in the fourth game, similar to the character option notification effect described above, for example, on the display screen of the auxiliary display unit 65, the display area displaying each option is displayed. is divided and displayed. Each display area is separately highlighted (for example, blinking) at a predetermined cycle.

In the fifth game, as shown in FIG. 74(a), in the weapon selection notification effect, the character selection operation effect of the effect switch 66 (in FIG. 74(a), the character imitating the effect switch 66 and the "PUSH" character display) occurs. In this case, based on the fact that the effect switch 66 is operated, the switching of the above-described highlighting stops while the display area corresponding to the weapon to be used this time is highlighted. In other words, when the effect switch 66 is operated in the fifth game, it is determined which weapon has been selected as the weapon to be used this time. Note that the switching cycle (predetermined cycle) of highlighting is also set as a relatively short cycle (for example, 0.5 sec per round). Therefore, when the display area highlighted at the timing when the effect switch 66 is operated by the player is different from the display area corresponding to the currently used weapon, the display area corresponding to the currently used weapon is different. Even if the switching of the highlighting is stopped after the switching of the highlighting is performed, it is difficult to cause a sense of incongruity.

After that, in the 6th game, the notification effect of the selected used weapon is performed. In this case, for example, as shown in FIGS. 75(a1) to 75(a3), the display area highlighted based on the operation in the fifth game is enlarged, and animation of the weapon used is displayed. . In this case, the speaker 64 emits a sound effect corresponding to the weapon used (the voice of the ally character when the weapon is equipped).

In the battle production, the 7th game and the 8th game may be set such that the friendly characters attack or the enemy characters attack, and the 9th game is set to always attack each other. That is, a pattern in which friendly characters attack in both the seventh and eighth games, a pattern in which friendly characters attack in the seventh game and enemy characters attack in the eighth game, and a pattern in which the enemy characters attack in the seventh game. There is a pattern in which the enemy character attacks in the 8th game after attacking, and a pattern in which the enemy character attacks in both the 7th and 8th games. In other words, the number of attacks of the teammate character is determined in the ninth game in the battle effect.

For example, FIG. 76(a) shows how a teammate character attacks in the first game of the battle effect (the seventh game of the continuous effect). Note that FIG. 76 shows a case where "zombie" is selected as the enemy character and "machine gun" is selected as the weapon to be used. In this case, as shown in FIG. 76(a1), after the image of the friendly character attacking is displayed, as shown in FIG. ) is displayed. Also, FIG. 76(b) shows how the enemy character attacks in the second game of the battle effect (the eighth game of the continuous effect). In this case, as shown in FIG. 76(b1), after the image of the enemy character attacking is displayed, as shown in FIG. is getting worse) is displayed. Then, FIG. 76(c) shows how players attack each other in the third game of the battle effect (the ninth game of the continuous effect). In this case, as shown in FIG. 76(c1), a state in which the friendly character is fired up for the final attack (in the figure, the friendly character is engulfed in flames) is displayed. As shown in the figure, the enemy character puts all his energy into the final attack (in the figure, the enemy character is displayed close-up).

After that, in the final game of the tenth game, as shown in FIG. 77, a result notification effect is performed. In this case, if the result notification effect in the current continuous effect is advantageous result notification and the ally character wins, the ally character roars with a weapon in one hand, and then, as shown in FIG. 77(a1). As shown in FIG. 77(a2), "CZ finalized" is displayed, and the game result (in the figure, winning the CZ mode transition lottery) that triggered the current continuous effect is reported. In addition, when the result notification effect in the current continuous effect is a non-advantageous result notification and the teammate character loses, as shown in FIG. As shown in b2), "Sorry!! See you later" is displayed, and the game result that triggered the continuous effect this time was not advantageous to the player (for example, the CZ mode transition lottery was not unreasonable). The fact that the winner was elected) is notified.

As described above, in the continuous effect, the effect of the previous game is inherited and the effect of the next game is set, and the effect of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize what game the current game is from the start of the continuous effect (how many games are there until the end of the continuous effect).

Hereinafter, the continuous effect setting process (step S2510) in the start time effect setting process (FIG. 59) will be described as the process related to the continuous effect. In addition, in this embodiment, it is mainly assumed that a CZ mode transition lottery (advantageous zone transition lottery) is performed, and continuous effects in that case will be described.

<Continuous production setting process>
In the continuous effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 64, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not the start command currently received includes a portent command or a pseudo portent command. If an omen command or a pseudo omen command is included, a chance effect setting process is executed in step S3002.

Here, in the chance effect, as shown in FIG. 70(b), for example, the auxiliary display section 65 displays characters "Chance!!" 32M and 32R are displayed in association with each other. In addition, in the chance presentation, the speaker 64 is controlled so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, an electronic sound of "kyui") is emitted. In the setting processing of the chance performance, first, a lottery processing of the chance performance is performed to determine whether or not to execute the chance performance when the transition trigger role or the like which triggered the output of the portent command or the pseudo portent command is won. In the chance effect lottery process, for example, a lottery is performed so that the chance effect occurs about half the time when the transition opportunity role is won. It should be noted that the winning probability of the chance effect lottery process may differ depending on the type of transition opportunity combination, display mode, game state, set value, and the like. Then, on the condition that the lottery is won, the auxiliary display part 65 and the like are controlled so that the chance presentation is performed.

Here, in the present slot machine 10, a game mode recommended for establishing the winning of each minor combination including the shift trigger combination will be described.

Among the winable hands in each game, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, and weak watermelon are set as small winning combinations that cannot be won depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42-44. . More specifically, as already explained, the strong cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 28th small combination, the 32nd small combination to the 35th small combination, and the 28th small combination symbol on the left reel 32L, The 32nd to 35th minor symbol symbols are the “cherry” symbol and the “second replay” symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 28th minor symbol, the 32nd minor symbol to the 35th minor symbol, the "Cherry" symbol, and the "2nd replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a strong cherry combination may be missed.

In addition, the weak cherry is a combination that can win any one of the 27th minor combination, the 32nd minor combination to the 35th minor combination, and the 27th minor combination symbol, the 32nd minor combination symbol to the 32nd minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L. The 35 small combination symbols are a "cherry" symbol and a "second replay" symbol. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the seventh "red bell" symbol to the twentieth "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, None of the 27th minor symbol, the 32nd minor symbol to the 35th minor symbol, ie, the "cherry" symbol and the "second replay" symbol can be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the stop operation of the left reel 32L is performed at these timings, a weak cherry combination may be missed.

The strong watermelon is a combination that can win either the 30th or 41st minor combination, and the 30th or 41st minor combination symbol for the left reel 32L is a "watermelon" symbol. In this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, the 30th The minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the strong watermelon combination will be missed.

The weak watermelon is a winning combination that can win either the 29th minor winning combination or the 41st minor winning combination, and the 29th minor winning combination symbol and the 41st minor winning combination symbol for the left reel 32L are "watermelon" symbols. Even in this case, in the 3-bet game, when the left reel 32L is stopped at the timing when the ninth "red 7" symbol to the third "white bell" symbol reach the upper stage of the left reel 32L, The 29th minor symbol and the 41st minor symbol "watermelon" cannot be stopped on the active line. Therefore, if the left reel 32L is stopped at these timings, the weak watermelon combination will be missed.

Then, when the left reel 32L is stopped while leaving the possibility of winning for any of these combinations that can be missed, the fourth "cherry" symbol to the sixth "second replay" symbol are displayed on the left reel 32L. It is necessary to perform a stop operation when reaching the upper stage. In the following description, this operation mode of the left reel 32L is also referred to as a specific operation mode (first operation mode) as an operation mode that does not cause a failure, and each operation mode that causes a failure is referred to as a non-specified operation. It is also called a mode (second operation mode).

In the chance presentation set in step S3002, it is suggested that the winning combination of this time is one of the transitional trigger roles, but it is set so that it is impossible or difficult to determine which transitional trigger role it is. It is That is, when the chance effect is performed, the winning combination of this game is likely to be either a strong cherry, a weak cherry, a strong watermelon, a weak watermelon, etc., but it is either a strong cherry or a weak cherry. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, or whether it is a strong cherry or a strong watermelon. Therefore, the player operates the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode so as not to cause a dropout even if any of the transition timing combinations is won.

Also, the chance effect does not necessarily occur in the game in which the transition opportunity role is won, but occurs on the condition that the player wins the chance effect lottery. Then, it is recommended to operate the left reel 32L in the above-described specific operation mode every game from the normal time so as not to miss the transition opportunity.

After the setting processing of the chance effect in step S3002 is performed, in step S3003, the number of portent games in the portent mode included in the portent command or the pseudo portent command is input to the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 183b. process. The continuous effect counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the game in which the continuous effect should be executed in the omen mode and the number of the current game in the continuous effect. For example, when the number of remaining games in the omen mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (10 remaining games), the continuous effect is started. In addition, since 10 games are set in the continuous effect of FIG. 71 in this embodiment, the continuous effect may not be executed when the precursor mode of less than 10 games is selected. In this case, in step S3003, if the information on the number of precursory games included in the precursory command or pseudo precursory command is less than 10 games, the game number input processing to the continuous effect counter may not be performed.

After executing the process of step S3003, in step S3004, the process of setting a continuous effect flag in the various flag storage area 183a is executed. Then, in step S3005, it is determined whether or not a pseudo precursor flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a. The pseudo portent flag is a flag that is set when the number of portent games and the setting of the continuous effect are performed based on the pseudo portent command from the main control device 101 . If the pseudo portent flag is not set, it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the command determined to have been received in step S3001 is a pseudo portent command. If it is a pseudo portent command, processing for setting a pseudo portent flag is executed in step S3007.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3005 that the pseudo precursor flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, it is determined whether or not the command determined to have been received in step S3001 is a pseudo precursor command. If it is a precursor command instead of a pseudo precursor command, processing for clearing the pseudo precursor flag is executed in step S3009.

If either step S3001 or step S3006 makes a negative determination, step S3008 makes a positive determination, or step S3007 or step S3009 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3010. In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S3011. Then, in step S3012, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is a number (1 to 10) corresponding to the continuous effect. When the continuous effect counter is the number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S3013 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S3014 to acquire the effect table for this portent from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3015, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is set from the effect table for this portent and the continuous effect counter.

Here, in this portent effect table, the selection rate of which option is selected is set for each option in selecting the effect corresponding to the continuous effect counter. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, in this portent effect table, the selection rate of each option of the enemy character in the enemy character selection effect, and the ratio of each option of the weapon to be used in the weapon selection effect. The selection rate and the selection rate of each option having the number of attacks of the ally character in the battle production as an option are set (in the figure, the selection rate at the time of victory is described). Further, the difference in the selection rate of each option is set to increase toward the rear side of the continuous presentation.

For example, in the enemy character selection effect, "zombie" as the first option is selected with a probability of 50%, "ninja" as the second option is selected with a probability of 30%, and "tank" is selected as the third option. ” is set to be selected with a probability of 20%. In addition, in the use weapon selection effect, 60% chose the “machine gun” as the first option, 30% chose the “knife” as the second option, and 10% chose the “hammer” as the third option. is set to be selected by In the battle production, the first option "friend character attacks twice" is selected with a probability of 80% to 65%, and the second option "friend character attacks once" is 18% to 25%. %, and the third option "friend character attacks 0 times" is set to be selected with a probability of 2% to 15%.

Here, in this omens effect table, although the selection rate of each option is different, the selection rate is set so that any option can be selected. That is, no matter which option is selected in each effect, there is still a possibility that the final result will be an advantageous result notification.

Then, in step S3015, after grasping the effect to be executed in the current game from the above-mentioned main omen effect table and the continuous effect counter, which option is to be selected is determined using a lottery counter. decide. Then, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182, and set as the effect data for the current continuous effect.

If it is determined in step S3013 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3016. In step S3016, a pseudo portent effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S3017, the effect data of the corresponding continuous effect is specified from the effect table for pseudo precursor and the continuous effect counter, and the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is set.

In the pseudo-predictive effect table, similarly to the main prognostic effect table, a selection rate is set for each option for selecting the effect corresponding to the continuous effect counter. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, in the pseudo-prediction effect table, the selection rate of each option for the enemy character in the enemy character selection effect, and the ratio of each option for the weapon to be used in the weapon selection effect The selection rate and the selection rate of each option having the number of attacks of the ally character in the battle production as an option are respectively set (in the figure, the selection rate at the time of defeat is described). Also, the pseudo portent effect table is set such that the later the effect in the continuous effect, the greater the difference in the selection rate of each option.

For example, in the enemy character selection effect, "zombie" as the first option is selected with a probability of 20%, "ninja" as the second option is selected with a probability of 30%, and "tank" is selected as the third option. ” is set to be selected with a probability of 50%. In addition, in the use weapon selection effect, 10% of the selection is for the “machine gun” as the first option, 30% is for the “knife” as the second option, and 60% is for the “hammer” as the third option. is set to be selected by In the battle production, the first option "friend character attacks twice" is selected with a probability of 2% to 15%, and the second option "friend character attacks once" is 18% to 25%. %, and the third option "friend character attacks 0 times" is set to be selected with a probability of 80% to 65%.

In other words, the selection rate of each option is set to have a reverse relationship between the main sign effect table and the pseudo sign effect table. The effect table is set so as to be difficult to select, and an option which is difficult to be selected in the present effect table for signs is set so as to be easily selected in the effect table for pseudo signs.

In the pseudo portent effect table as well, the selection rate of each option is different, but the selection rate is set so that any option can be selected, similarly to the main portent effect table. In other words, no matter which option is selected in each effect, there is a possibility that the final result will be a non-advantageous result notification.

In step S3017, the effect to be executed in the current game is grasped from the pseudo-prediction effect table and the continuous effect counter, and then which option to select is determined using the lottery counter. . Then, the corresponding effect data is acquired from the effect data storage area 182b of the ROM 182 and set as the effect data for the current continuous effect.

After performing the processing of step S3015 or step S3017, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect counter is 0 in step S3018. When the continuous effect counter is 0, point correspondence processing is executed in step S3019. The point correspondence processing will be described later in detail. Then, in step S3020, after performing the process of clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag, the continuous effect setting process is terminated. Further, if a negative determination is made in any of step S3010, step S3012 and step S3018, the continuous effect setting process is terminated as it is.

FIG. 79 shows the difference in the degree of expectation of victory when each option is selected between the real omens effect table and the pseudo omens effect table. That is, in the enemy character selection effect, whether "zombie" is selected or "tank" is selected, the effect is set based on this precursor effect table, or is a pseudo precursor effect. As a difference between whether or not it is set based on the effect table for use, the difference in the degree of expectation that the continuous effect will finally end with the victory of the ally character is 1 when "tank" is selected. 2.5 if "zombie" is selected. The continuous effect progresses, and in the weapon selection effect, when "machine gun" is selected and when "hammer" is selected, the continuous effect will finally end with the victory of the ally character. If the difference is 1 when the "hammer" is selected, the difference is 3.2 to 11.3 when the "machine gun" is selected, which is larger than the difference in the enemy character selection effect. Furthermore, the continuous production progresses, and in the battle production, when "ally character attacks twice" is selected and when "ally character attacks 0 times" is selected, the continuous effect is finally a friend The difference in the degree of expectation ending with the character's victory is 1 when "friend character attacks 0 times" is selected, and when "friend character attacks twice" is selected, the difference is 3.7 to 30. 5, which is larger than the difference in the enemy character selection effect and the use weapon selection effect.

In other words, in the real omen effect table and the pseudo omen effect table, the difference in the selection rate of each option is set to increase toward the end of the continuous effect, so that the more the continuous effect progresses, the more The difference in the degree of expectation that the continuous effect will finally end with the victory of the ally character increases. As a result, as the continuous effect progresses, it becomes easier to understand whether the continuous effect ends with the victory of the ally character or with the defeat of the ally character.

<Processing for operation>
Next, the operation corresponding processing executed in step S2311 in the effect setting processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not the operation of the production switch 66 among the operation means for various productions has been performed. When the effect switch 66 is operated, the process proceeds to step S3102, and it is determined whether or not it is the operation effective period of the effect switch 66.例文帳に追加The operation effective period is, for example, a period set or preset for performing the operation instruction effect of the effect switch 66, and if the operation is within the operation effective period, the effect corresponding to the operation is performed. If it is an operation outside the operation valid period, the effect corresponding to the operation is not generated. That is, if it is determined in step S3102 that it is within the operation effective period, in step S3103, processing for setting an operation-responsive effect is executed, and then this operation-responsive processing ends. Further, if it is determined in step S3102 that it is outside the operation valid period, the operation corresponding process is terminated without setting the operation corresponding effect.

If it is determined in step S3101 that the effect switch 66 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 has been operated. If none of the selection switches 87 and 88 have been operated, the operation handling process is terminated, and if one of the selection switches 87 and 88 has been operated, the selection handling process is executed in step S3105. After that, the operation corresponding processing is terminated.

<Playability that predicts the success or failure of continuous effects>
Here, game characteristics using the first selection switches 87 and 88 in the slot machine 10 will be described.

As described above, in the continuous effect, various effects are executed over a plurality of games, and the advantageous result notification or the unfavorable result notification is performed as the result notification effect in the final game. The slot machine 10 allows the player to predict whether the continuous performance will be terminated with an advantageous result notification or with an unadvantageous result notification. The first selection switch 87 is operated when the player predicts that the continuous performance will be an advantageous result notification, and the second selection switch 88 is operated when the player predicts that the continuous performance will be a non-advantageous result notification. is operated by

Then, if the prediction is correct, that is, when the player predicts that the first selection switch 87 is operated and the continuous performance is terminated as the advantageous result notification, the continuous performance is actually terminated as the advantageous result notification. Alternatively, when the second selection switch 88 is operated and the player predicts that the continuous performance will end as a non-advantageous result notification, if the continuous performance actually ends as a non-advantageous result, points are given to the player. is given. On the other hand, when the prediction is not correct, that is, when the player predicts that the first selection switch 87 is operated and the continuous performance is terminated as an advantageous result notification, the continuous performance is actually a non-advantageous result notification. When the game ends, or when the second selection switch 88 is operated and the player predicts that the continuous performance will end as a non-advantageous result notification, when the continuous performance actually ends with an advantageous result, the game is performed. No points are awarded to the person.

And, it is set so that the more the prediction is made in the early number of games in the continuous production, the more points are awarded when the prediction is correct. It is set so that less points are awarded.

In this embodiment, a privilege is given to the player according to the points to be given, and as the privilege, a set value suggesting effect can occur.

For example, at the start of the continuous effect, in more detail, as shown in FIG. The operation explanation display of the game property to be performed is performed. Specifically, for example, the display "Find out the fake production!" It is notified to determine whether it corresponds to a pseudo omen (fake effect) that ends with. Further, as an operation explanation display, it is instructed that the first selection switch 87 should be operated when the real omen is predicted, and the second selection switch 88 should be operated when the false omen is predicted. Show what should be done. It will also be explained that the earlier the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is operated (the earlier the game is operated in the continuous effect), the more benefits are given thereafter.

As for the operation instruction display, as shown in FIG. 80(a), a large display using the entire display screen of the auxiliary display section 65, and as shown in FIG. The small display used is set. When the operation explanation display of the small display is performed, the various display effects shown in FIGS. 72 to 77 are executed so that the operation explanation display and the display area do not overlap (see FIG. 80(b)).

As shown in FIG. 81, the timing at which the operation explanation display of the large display and the small display is performed is set such that the operation explanation display as the large display is performed in the previous game of the game in which the continuous effect is started. . Further, in the second game, fifth game, and eighth game in the continuous effect, the operation explanation display as a small display is set to be performed. In the 1st game, the 3rd game, the 4th game, the 6th game, the 7th game, the 9th game, and the 10th game of the continuous effect, none of the operation explanation display is performed.

The points given when the prediction is correct are when the prediction is made in the situation where the enemy character selection effect is being performed in the first to third games (the first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 are 3 points are set as the points with the highest number of points when the weapon is operated), and 2 points are set when prediction is performed in the situation where the weapon selection effect is performed in the 4th to 6th games, One point is set in the case where the prediction is made in the situation where the battle effects of the 7th to 9th games are being performed. Further, it is set that points are not given (0 points are given) even if prediction is performed in a situation where the result notification effect of the tenth game is being performed. In addition, no points are awarded (0 points are awarded) if the prediction is wrong in any number of games.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a continuous effect in which it is not determined whether the advantageous result notification or the non-advantageous result notification will be performed until the final game, it is predicted which result will be notified in the intermediate game. If the prediction is correct, a privilege is given to the player. As a result, not only the continuous performance of the advantageous result notification in which the player is notified of the advantageous result, but also the continuous performance of the non-advantageous result notification in which the advantageous result is not notified can attract the interest of the player. It becomes possible.

Various processing configurations for executing the above prediction game will be described below. As the processing for the prediction game, a selection corresponding process (FIG. 65, step S3105) in the operation corresponding process and a point corresponding process (FIG. 64, step S3019) in the continuous effect setting process are set.

<Processing for selection>
The selection response process is a process that is executed when the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is operated (step S3104: YES). This is a process of specifying and setting points to be given for a correct answer according to the specified timing.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is during the continuous effect. More specifically, when the continuous performance counter is 1 to 10, it is determined that the continuous performance is being performed. If the continuous effect is not being performed, the operation of the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is not valid, so the selection handling process is terminated. If the continuous effect is being performed, it is determined in step S3202 whether or not either the first selection flag or the second selection flag is set in the flag storage area 183a. The first selection operation completion flag is a flag for the CPU 181 to specify that the first selection switch 87 has been operated in the current continuous effect, and the second selection operation completion flag is the second selection in the current continuous effect. This is a flag for the CPU 181 to specify that the switch 88 has been operated. If it is determined in step S3202 that any of the selection operation flags has been set, the selection handling process ends without performing the processes after step S3203. In other words, in the continuous effect, there is only one chance to select which selection switch 87, 88 to operate, and after operating either selection switch 87, 88, if the prediction is wrong. Even if you realize that, you can't revise your predictions.

If it is determined that none of the selection operation flags have been set, the process advances to step S3203. In step S 3203 , it is determined whether or not the current operation is the first selection switch 87 . If it is the first selection switch 87, that is, if it is predicted that the current continuous effect will result in an advantageous result notification, in step S3204, a process of setting the first selection operation completed flag is executed. On the other hand, in step S3203, it is determined that it is the second selection switch 88 instead of the first selection switch 87, and when it is predicted that the current continuous effect will be a non-advantageous result notification, in step S3205, the above-mentioned second Execute processing to set the selection operation completed flag.

After executing the process of step S3204 or step S3205, the process of setting points for correct answers is performed in steps S3206 to S3212.

That is, in step S3206, by referring to the current continuous effect counter, it is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed in the first game to the third game in the continuous effect. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3206, in step S3207, processing for setting 3 as the points given for correct answer this time is executed, and then this selection handling processing ends. The correct answer points are temporarily stored in the RAM 183 by, for example, inputting a predetermined value to a correct answer counter provided in the various counter areas 183b.

If it is determined in step S3206 that it is not the first to third games, it is determined in step S3208 whether or not a selection effect has been performed in the fourth to sixth games. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3208, in step S3209, the processing for setting 2 as the points given for correct answer this time is executed, and then this selection handling processing ends. If it is determined in step S3208 that it is not the 4th to 6th games, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not a selection effect has been performed in the 7th to 9th games. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3210, then in step S3211 a process of setting 1 as the point given for correct answer this time is executed, and then this selection handling process ends. A negative determination in step S3210 means that the current selection operation is performed in the 10th game of the continuous effect. In this case, in step S3212, the processing for setting 0 as the points given for the correct answer this time is executed, and then the selection processing ends.

<Point correspondence processing>
The point correspondence process is a process executed when the continuous effect is terminated in the continuous effect setting process, and is executed at the start of the final game (10th game) of the continuous effect.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 83, by confirming the presence or absence of a pseudo flag in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the continuous effect to be terminated this time is to be terminated as a non-advantageous result notification. If the continuous effect that ends this time ends as an advantageous result notification instead of a non-advantageous result notification, the process proceeds to step S3302, the first selection operation completed flag is set, and the current continuous effect ends as an advantageous result notification. It is determined whether it was predicted that it would end as That is, in step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current prediction was correct. If the first selection operation completion flag is set and the current prediction is correct, the process advances to step S3303 to execute the process of ascertaining the previously set awarded points for correct answer. Then, in step S3304, a process of adding points given for correct answer this time to the cumulative correct answer counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The cumulative correct answer counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to ascertain the cumulative value of points given for correct answers, and in the present embodiment, benefits are awarded to the player based on the cumulative correct answer counter.

If the pseudo flag is set in step S3301 and the current continuous effect ends as a non-advantageous result notification, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the above-mentioned second selection operation completion flag is set, and it is determined whether or not it is predicted that the current continuous effect will end as a non-advantageous result notification. That is, in step S3305, it is determined whether or not the current prediction was correct. If the second selection operation completion flag is set and the current prediction is correct, the process advances to step S3306 to execute the process of ascertaining the points to be given for correct answers that have already been set. Then, in step S3307, a process of adding points given for correct answer this time to the cumulative correct answer counter is executed.

After executing any of the processes in steps S3304 and S3307, and when a negative determination is made in either of steps S3302 and S3305 (when the current prediction is incorrect or when the current prediction is performed). If not, the process proceeds to step S3308. In step S3308, processing for clearing each selection operation completed flag is executed. As a result, a new selection operation becomes possible in the next continuous effect. After executing the process of step S3308, the point correspondence process is ended.

<Benefits based on points given when correct>
Next, the privilege provided by accumulating points given for correct answer by the cumulative correct answer counter will be described. As a benefit, in the present embodiment, as described above, the set value suggestion effect is performed, and in the bonus end effect at the end of the first BB state or the second BB state, the set value suggestion is performed. there is Therefore, the processing for setting the bonus ending effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84 and the like.

In step S3401, the number of medals acquired in the bonus state ending this time is grasped. Then, in step S3402, the process of grasping the cumulative correct counter is executed. In step S3403, a process of acquiring a special end effect table from the various table storage area 182a is executed.

In the special end effect table, as shown in FIG. 85, the occurrence rate of the special effect in the bonus end effect is set according to the value of the cumulative correct answer counter and the set value set in the winning probability setting process. . In this embodiment, special effects A, B, C, and D are set as the special effects. As shown in FIG. are different from each other, and the player can clearly grasp which of the special effects A to D is.

As shown in FIG. 85, the special effect A is an effect that occurs only when the set value is 6, and is an effect that allows the player to recognize that the set value is 6. In other words, the special effect A is a effect that makes it possible to grasp that the set values are not 1-5. The special effect B is an effect that occurs when the set value is 4 to 6, and is an effect that allows the player to grasp that the set value is 4 or more. In other words, the special effect B is a effect that makes it possible to grasp that the set value is not 3 or less. The special effect C and the special effect D are effects suggesting whether the set values are even or odd. Specifically, the special effect C is an effect that is likely to occur when the set values are 2, 4, and 6, and is less likely to occur when the set values are 1, 3, and 5. It is a production that makes it possible to grasp that there is a high possibility that it is. The special effect D is an effect that is likely to occur when the set values are 1, 3, and 5, and is less likely to occur when the set values are 2, 4, and 6. It is a production that makes it possible to grasp high things.

The special end effect table is set so that the rate of occurrence of the special effects A to D increases as the cumulative correct counter value increases. Specifically, when the set value is 6, the occurrence rate of the special effect A is 3% when the cumulative correct counter is 0 to 29, whereas the cumulative correct counter is 60 or more. In the case of , it is set to 9%, and the occurrence rate of the special effect A can be tripled depending on the value of the cumulative correct answer counter. In addition, in the special effect B, for example, the occurrence rate when the set value is 4 is 5% when the cumulative correct counter is 0 to 29, whereas when the cumulative correct counter is 60 or more, the occurrence rate is 5%. In some cases, it is set to 15%, and the occurrence rate of the special effect B can be tripled depending on the value of the cumulative correct answer counter. In the special effect C, for example, the occurrence rate when the set value is 2 is 20% when the cumulative correct counter is 0 to 29, whereas when the cumulative correct counter is 60 or more, the occurrence rate is 20%. is 40%, and the occurrence rate of the special effect C can be doubled depending on the value of the cumulative correct answer counter. In the special effect D, for example, the occurrence rate when the set value is 3 is 15% when the cumulative correct counter is 0 to 29, whereas when the cumulative correct counter is 60 or more, the occurrence rate is 15%. is 35%, and the occurrence rate of the special effect D can be doubled or more depending on the value of the cumulative correct answer counter.

In the bonus end effect setting process, after the special end effect table is acquired in step S3403, the effect lottery process is executed in step S3404. That is, as the bonus end effect this time, a lottery for whether or not to generate each of the above special effects A to D is performed based on the special end effect table, the set value, the cumulative correct counter, and the lottery counter. conduct. Then, in step S3405, the process of setting the end effect according to the lottery result of step S3404 is executed, and the setting process of the bonus end effect is finished.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the portent mode or the pseudo portent mode is set based on the CZ mode transition lottery or the like, a continuous effect occurs, and the result of the CZ mode transition lottery or the like is notified in the continuous effect. The arrangement allows the player to predict the outcome before the outcome is announced. Then, if the prediction is correct, setting value suggestion can occur as a privilege. In this case, even if it is predicted that the CZ mode transition lottery will not be won, that is, even if it is predicted that the continuous effect will end with the notification of the non-advantageous result, if the prediction is correct, the privilege is given. For this reason, even a continuous effect that ends with the notification of an unfavorable result is significant, and it is possible to favorably increase the attention of the player.

In this case, the selection rate of each option in the continuous production is set so that the selection rate of the option with a high selection rate in the case of the advantageous result notification has a low selection rate in the case of the non-advantageous result notification, and the advantageous result notification and the If the selection rate is low, the selection rate will be high when the unfavorable result is reported, so it is possible to predict which result will be reported from each option in the continuous production. As a result, it is possible to suitably implement the above-described prediction game.

Moreover, in the present embodiment, the selection rate of each option is such that the selection rate for the advantageous result notification and the selection rate for the non-advantageous result notification are in the opposite relationship. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 78, for example, in the enemy character selection effect, the selection rate of "zombie" is 50% when an advantageous result is announced, whereas a non-advantageous result is announced. In this case, the selection rate of "zombie" is 20%, and the selection rate of "tank" is 20% in the case of advantageous result notification, whereas the non-advantageous result notification and In this case, the selection rate of "tank" is 50%, and when "zombie" is selected, there is an expectation that an advantageous result will be reported, and when "tank" is selected, an unfavorable result will be reported. The degree of expectation will be the same as If the selection rate of each option as described above is biased between the case of advantageous result notification and the case of non-advantageous result notification, that is, for example, when "zombie" is selected, advantageous result notification If the expected level of is higher than the expected level of unfavorable result notification when "tank" is selected, it is predicted that the favorable result notification will be given in the situation where "zombie" is selected. The accuracy rate in the case where the "tank" is selected is higher than the accuracy rate in the case of predicting that it is an unfavorable result notification in the situation where "tank" is selected. In other words, the prediction difficulty level of the advantageous result notification and the prediction difficulty level of the non-advantageous result notification are different from the viewpoint of the selection rate of each option. In this respect, in the present embodiment, as described above, there is an expectation that an advantageous result will be reported when "zombie" is selected, and an expectation that an unfavorable result will be reported when "tank" is selected. The difficulty of predicting favorable results and the difficulty of predicting non-favorable results are set to be about the same in terms of the selection rate of each option. It is possible to enjoy both the game in which the player predicts that the game will be played and the game in which the game predicts that the player will be notified of an unfavorable result.

However, as already explained, the CZ mode transition lottery is performed based on the transition trigger role such as strong cherry, and the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery differs depending on the type of the transition trigger role. For example, as shown in FIG. 39, the CZ mode shift lottery triggered by a strong cherry wins 60%, while the CZ mode shift lottery triggered by a weak cherry wins 5%. is easier to win the CZ mode transition lottery than weak cherry. Then, when the continuous performance is generated with the strong cherry as a trigger, the continuous performance is more likely to end with the advantageous result notification than when the continuous performance is generated with the weak cherry as the trigger.

Specifically, FIGS. 87 to 89 show the relationship between each transition trigger role and options for continuous effects.

For example, in a continuous effect triggered by a strong cherry, as shown in FIG. In the continuous effect triggered by weak cherries, the degree of expectation of advantageous result notification when "zombie" is selected is about 12%. Therefore, it is possible to predict whether it will be an advantageous result notification or an unfavorable result notification also from the relationship with the game result that triggered such a continuous effect, and such a heavy game playability can be made. is planned.

However, as described above, it is possible to expect even a weak cherry with a relatively low degree of expectation to be announcing an advantageous result, depending on the combination of options in the continuous effect, to be announcing an advantageous result. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 88, when a "zombie" is selected as an enemy character and then a "machine gun" is selected as a weapon to be used, even a continuous effect triggered by a weak cherry is advantageous. The degree of expectation for the result notification is about 44%, which is higher than when "zombie" was selected. Also, as shown in FIG. 89, after selecting "zombie" as the enemy character, "machine gun" is selected as the weapon to be used, and "ally character attacks twice" is selected as the battle effect. Even with a continuous performance triggered by , the expectation of an advantageous result notification is about 97%, which is overwhelmingly higher than when "Zombie" or "Machine Gun" is selected. . By doing so, regardless of the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery, it is possible to predict the result of the continuous effect from the combination of each option, and it is possible to suitably realize the above-mentioned predicted game characteristics. It becomes possible.

When points are accumulated as a result of the prediction game, a set value is suggested as a privilege according to the points by winning a bonus. By doing so, compared to the configuration in which the privilege is granted each time, the frequency of granting the privilege can be lowered to increase the rarity of the privilege, and the setting value suggestion as the privilege can be improved. It is possible to raise interest.

In the above predictive game property, by limiting the operation of the selection switches 87 and 88 to one time, it becomes possible to perform the predictive operation more carefully. On top of that, in the continuous production, the earlier the operation is performed, the more points are given. The balance makes it possible to greatly enhance the feeling of excitement when performing a prediction operation.

<Modification 1>
In one continuous performance, when the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is not operated, the point in the continuous performance may be carried over to the next continuous performance. FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing point correspondence processing in this modified example.

In step S3501, it is determined whether or not the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 has been operated at the end of the current continuous effect by confirming the presence or absence of each selection operation completed flag. If any of the selection switches 87 and 88 has been operated, in steps S3502 to S3509, processing for giving points is performed based on the success or failure of the selection operation. The processing of steps S3502 to S3509 is the same as the processing of steps S3301 to S3308.

If it is determined in step S3501 that none of the selection operation completed flags has been set and the selection switches 87 and 88 have not been operated in the current continuous effect, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, it is determined whether or not the carryover counter provided in the various counter area 183b is zero. The carryover counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to ascertain the number of consecutive effects in which the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated. When it is determined that the carry-over counter is 0 in step S3510, it mainly means that the selection switches 87 and 88 were operated in the previous continuous effect. If the carryover counter is 0, the process advances to step S3511 to input 1 to the carryover counter, and then the point handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S3510 that the carryover counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step S3512. In step S3512, it is determined whether the carryover counter is 1 or not. If the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated in the continuous effect next to the continuous effect in which the process of step S3511 is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3512. If the carryover counter is 1, the process advances to step S3513 to input 2 to the carryover counter, and then the point handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S3512 that the carryover counter is not 1, the process proceeds to step S3514. In step S3514, it is determined whether or not the carryover counter is two. If the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated in the continuous effect next to the continuous effect in which the process of step S3513 is performed, an affirmative determination is made in step S3514. If the carryover counter is 2, the process advances to step S3515 to input 3 to the carryover counter, and then the point handling process ends.

If it is determined in step S3514 that the carryover counter is not 2, the process proceeds to step S3516. When the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated in the continuous effect next to the continuous effect in which the process of step S3515 is performed, the process proceeds to step S3516. In this case, in step S3516, a process of clearing the carryover counter to 0 is executed. In other words, the number of continuous performances in which the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated is grasped up to three times at maximum. Since the carry-over counter is set to 0, in the next continuous effect, if the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated again, an affirmative determination is made in step S3510. After executing the process of step S3516, the point correspondence process is ended.

Next, selection handling processing in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 91(a).

The processing of steps S3601 to S3612 is the same as the processing of steps S3201 to S3212 described above. In this modified example, the processing after the points to be given for correct answer are set in step S3607, step S3609, step S3611, or step S3612 is different. That is, after setting the points to be given for correct answer in each of the above processes, the process proceeds to step S3613.

In step S3613, it is determined whether or not the carryover counter is 1 or more. When the carryover counter is 1 or more, it means that the selection switches 87 and 88 were not operated in the previous continuous performance, and the number of consecutive performances in which the selection switches 87 and 88 were not operated. It means that it is a continuous performance before reaching 3 times. In this case, the process advances to step S3614 to execute a process of adding a predetermined point to the point given for correct answer according to the value of the carryover counter. Specifically, in step S3614, a carryover addition point table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a. As shown in FIG. 91(b), the carry-over addition point table is a game in which the value of the carry-over counter and points given for correct answers are set, that is, in a continuous effect, the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated. The number of points to be added to the points given for correct answers is set according to the number of games played.

Specifically, for example, when the carryover counter is 1 and the selection switches 87 and 88 were not operated in the previous continuous effect, the selection switches 87, 88, When the operation of 88 is performed, 3 is set as the number of points to be added to the points given for correct answer. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the prediction is difficult from each option generated in the continuous performance, the prediction can be carried over to the next continuous performance and double points can be obtained.

Further, when the carryover counter is 1 and the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the 4th to 6th games of the continuous effect, 1 is set as the number of points to be added to the correct answer points. When the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the 7th to 9th games of the continuous effect, 0 is set as the number of points to be added to the points given for correct answers. In other words, the points added when the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the first to third games are the same as the normal number of points (the number of points when the carryover counter is 0), Points added when the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the 4th to 9th games are set to be less than the normal number of points. Therefore, when the prediction in the continuous effect is carried over, it is possible to acquire a lot of points by making a prediction in the early game number, but in the later game number, the acquired points will be less than the regular number of points. , more high-stakes predictions are recommended.

Further, in the carryover addition point table, even if the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the same number of games in the continuous effect, the larger the value of the carryover counter, the larger the addition point. It is Specifically, for example, when the carryover counter is 1 and when the carryover counter is 2, the added points are compared when the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated in the first to third games. When the carryover counter is 1, the additional points are 3, whereas when the carryover counter is 2, the additional points are set to 5. The more points you get, the better. However, when comparing the additional points (3) when the carryover counter is 1 and the additional points (5) when the carryover counter is 2, the additional points when the carryover counter is 2 are the same as when the carryover counter is 1. The number of points is set to be less than twice the additional points. That is, although more points are added when the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated after being carried over, the points are not carried over as they are, but are carried over as a slightly smaller number of points. Moreover, as described above, after the carryover counter reaches 3, the carryover counter is cleared to 0 if the selection switches 87 and 88 are not operated. Therefore, the operation of the selection switches 87 and 88 at an earlier stage is urged while making it possible to select and predict an easily predictable continuous effect.

After adding the correct answer points in accordance with the carryover addition point table in step S3614, the carryover counter is cleared to 0 in step S3415, and then this operation handling process ends.

As described above, in the present modification, in the game in which the success or failure of the continuous performance is predicted, the prediction is carried over, so that the player can select the continuous performance that is easy to predict the success or failure. . As a result, in the continuous performance, not only is it fun to select an option whose success/failure is easy to predict, but even if an option whose success/failure is easy to predict is not selected, the continuous performance can be enjoyed. It becomes possible.

Further, if the prediction of the success or failure of the continuous performance is carried over, the difference in the number of points between the case where the prediction is made at an early stage in the continuous performance and the case where the prediction is made at the late stage becomes large. Therefore, by carrying over the prediction of the continuous effect, the gambling aspect of the prediction game is further enhanced, and it is possible to provide a more intense feeling of excitement.

When the prediction of the success or failure of the continuous production is carried over, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player who makes the prediction each time by adopting a configuration in which the number of points carried over is less than the number of points when it is not carried over. becomes. In addition, since the prediction carryover of the success or failure of the continuous effect is set to three times in a row, it is possible to secure the superiority of the player who makes predictions each time, and to increase the participation in the prediction game. can be encouraged.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the relationship with effects generated based on the player's operation will be described. As an effect generated based on the player's operation, for example, there is an effect set in the operation corresponding effect setting process (step S3103) in the operation corresponding process (FIG. 65) as the operation of the effect switch 66. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing setting processing of such an operation-responsive effect. As described above, the operation-responsive effect setting process is a process that is started when the effect switch 66 is operated during the operation valid period.

In step S3701, it is determined whether or not the current operation of the effect switch 66 is an operation for cut-in effect set in the continuous effect. The cut-in effect is a effect of inserting a predetermined image mainly based on the operation of the effect switch 66 during a predetermined display effect on the auxiliary display section 65 .

Specifically, as a cut-in effect during the continuous effect, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 93(a4), a display image in which the face of the teammate character is displayed close-up is inserted. FIG. 93(a2) shows a case in which a display image is inserted in which the friendly character's eyes are in flames and the enthusiastic face is displayed. FIG. 93(a4) shows a case in which a display image in which the dull face of the teammate character is displayed is inserted. Then, as shown in FIG. 93(b), depending on the type of the display image to be inserted, the degree of expectation that the continuous effect ends as an advantageous result notification is set differently. The effect in which the display image is inserted is a strong cut-in effect, and is set so that the degree of expectation for the notification of the most advantageous result is high, and the effect in which the display image of FIG. It is set so that the degree of expectation for the most unfavorable result notification is high.

When it is determined in step S3701 that the operation is for cut-in effect during continuous effect, the process proceeds to step S3702, and the number of games of continuous effect at the time of operation is grasped based on the continuous effect counter. In the subsequent step S3703, by confirming the presence or absence of a pseudo flag, it is grasped whether the current continuous effect ends as an advantageous result notification or an unadvantageous result notification. Then, in step S3704, an operation corresponding effect table is acquired from the various table storage area 182a, and in step S3705, the type of cut-in effect to be generated as the current operation corresponding effect is determined by lottery.

In the operation corresponding effect table, as shown in FIG. 94, the selection rate of the cut-in effect to be generated is set differently depending on the presence or absence of the pseudo flag and the number of games in the continuous effect at the time of operation. For example, in a series of effects in which no pseudo flag is set and ends as an advantageous result notification, in the first to third games, the strong cut-in effect is selected at 20%, while the weak cut-in effect is selected at 10%. %, and the rest selects a medium cut-in effect. In the fourth to sixth games, the strong cut-in effect is selected at 30%, while the weak cut-in effect is selected at 10%, and the selection rate of the strong cut-in effect is increased from the first game to the third game. higher than Then, from the 7th game to the 9th game, the selection rate of the strong cut-in effect is further increased (40%).

On the other hand, in the continuous effect in which the pseudo flag is set and ends as a non-advantageous result notification, the weak cut-in effect is selected at 20% from the first game to the third game, while the strong cut-in effect is selected at 20%. The effect is selected at 10%, and the middle cut-in effect is selected for the rest. In the fourth to sixth games, the weak cut-in effect is selected at 30%, while the strong cut-in effect is selected at 10%, and the selection rate of the weak cut-in effect is the first to third games. higher than Then, from the 7th game to the 9th game, the selection rate of the weak cut-in effect is further increased (40%).

That is, even in the selection rate of the cut-in effect, the difference in the selection rate becomes large as the continuous effect game progresses between the continuous effect that ends with the notification of the advantageous result and the continuous effect that ends with the notification of the unfavorable result. The selected cut-in effect also helps in predicting when the result will be announced.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the selection rate of the cut-in effect is set to differ depending on the game state. That is, as shown in FIG. 94, in the operation corresponding effect table, in addition to the selection rate for the normal time, the selection rate for the special time is set up to the 50th game after the end of the bonus as a special time.

As for the selection rate at the special time, in the continuous effect ending with the notification of the advantageous result, the strong cut-in effect is selected at 40% from the first game to the third game, and is more likely to be selected than at 20% in the normal time. is set to Also, from the 4th game to the 6th game, the strong cut-in effect is selected at 50%, which is more likely to be selected than the normal 30%. Selected at 60% higher than time.

In addition, even in the continuous effect that ends as a non-advantageous result notification, the weak cut-in effect is selected at 40%, which is higher than the normal time, in the first to third games, and the weak cut-in effect is selected in the fourth to sixth games. The in effect is selected at 50%, which is higher than normal, and the weak cut-in effect is selected at 60%, which is higher than normal, even in the 7th to 9th games.

In other words, in the special time up to the 50th game after the end of the bonus, it is possible to more easily predict which result will be the continuous effect depending on the type of cut-in effect than in the normal time. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that a continuous performance will occur at a special time. Moreover, in such a special time, for example, even if the winning probability of the CZ mode transition lottery is not increased, the expectation for the occurrence of such continuous performance is increased, so that the game performance can be performed while avoiding a rise in the ball payout rate. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to.

In step S3701, if it is determined that it is not the operation for cut-in effect that is set in the continuous effect, after grasping the operation instruction effect that has triggered the operation in step S3707, in step S3708, the operation instruction After setting the operation corresponding effect corresponding to the effect, the setting processing of this operation corresponding effect is finished. The operation instruction effects in this case include, for example, a character selection operation in an enemy character selection effect (FIG. 72(a)) in a continuous effect, a weapon selection operation in a weapon selection effect (FIG. 74(a)), and the like. The operation instruction effect of the effect switch 66 corresponds, and the selected character notification (Fig. 72(b), Fig. 73) and the selected weapon notification (Fig. 74(b), Fig. 75) correspond to the operation corresponding effect.

The specified time is not limited to the 50th game after the end of the bonus game, and may be the predetermined game after the end of the CZ mode or the predetermined game after the end of the AT mode. Alternatively, the game may be played until a predetermined number of games after the power is turned on, or the game may be played until the end lottery is won as a configuration in which a predetermined end lottery is performed from the game serving as a base point, or the end lottery may be played. It is also possible to play the game from winning the prize to playing a predetermined game.

Also, it is preferable that the player can identify the specific time. For example, all or part of the display effects (for example, the background color) of the auxiliary display section 65 may be configured to be different from the normal time.

<Modification 3>
In this modified example, points given for a correct answer are varied according to the type of transition trigger combination that triggered the CZ mode transition lottery. As described above, the probability of winning the CZ mode transition lottery is different depending on the type of transition trigger role, for example, comparing the CZ mode transition lottery triggered by a strong cherry and the CZ mode transition lottery triggered by a weak cherry Then, it is easier to win the prize if the strong cherry is used as an opportunity. Therefore, a continuous effect triggered by a strong cherry is likely to end as an advantageous result notification, and a continuous effect triggered by a weak cherry is likely to end as a non-advantageous result.

In this modification, for example, when there is a high possibility of ending as an advantageous result notification such as a continuous effect triggered by a strong cherry, it is not predicted that it will end as an advantageous result notification, but ends as an unfavorable result notification. If the prediction of what to do is successful, the number of points given at the time of correct answer increases, and if there is a high possibility that it will end as a non-advantageous result notification like a continuous production triggered by a weak cherry, the non-advantageous result If the prediction of the termination as an advantageous result notification is successful instead of the prediction that the game will end as a notification, the number of points given for a correct answer is set to increase.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 95 to 97, for example, when "zombie" is selected in the enemy character selection effect, the degree of expectation of victory (probability of announcing an advantageous result ) is about 71%. When the transition trigger role is taken into account, especially in the case of the strong cherry, the win expectation is higher than when the transition trigger role is not taken into account, and in the case of the weak cherry and the weak watermelon, the transition trigger role is not taken into account. It will be lower than the winning expectation in the case. In addition, in the enemy character selection effect, when the "tank" is selected, the degree of expectation of victory is about 29% when the transition opportunity is not taken into account. In this case as well, if the transition trigger role is taken into account, especially in the case of a strong cherry, the winning expectation is higher than when the transition trigger role is not taken into account, and in the case of a weak cherry or a weak watermelon, the transition trigger role is not added. It will be lower than the win expectation when not taking into account.

In other words, no matter which option is selected in the enemy character selection effect, it is easier than usual to predict that an advantageous result will be announced when triggered by strong cherries, while weak cherries and weak watermelons are triggered. In some cases, predicting favorable results is more difficult than usual. In other words, regardless of which option is selected, it is more difficult than usual to predict a non-advantageous outcome notification when the trigger is a strong cherry, whereas when the trigger is a weak cherry or watermelon, it is non-favorable. It is easier than usual to predict favorable results.

Therefore, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 95, in the continuous effect triggered by the strong cherry, the enemy character selection effect predicts that an unfavorable result will be announced (the second selection switch 88 is operated). I), if the prediction is correct, 5 points are given as more points than the normal correct answer (3 points), and it is predicted that an advantageous result will be announced (first selection switch 87 is performed), and if the prediction is correct, 1 point is given as a point less than the points normally given for correct answer. Also, in a continuous production triggered by a weak cherry or a weak watermelon, a prediction with an advantageous result notification is made in the enemy character selection production, and if the prediction is correct, more points are given than the normal correct answer 5 points are given as a large number of points, and prediction with an unfavorable result notification is performed, and if the prediction is correct, 1 point is given as a point less than the points given for normal correct answers. do.

The same is true for the weapon selection effect. As shown in FIG. 96, in the continuous effect triggered by the strong cherry, the weapon selection effect predicts that an unfavorable result will be announced, and the prediction is correct. 3 points are given as more points than the normal correct answer (2 points), and it is predicted that an advantageous result will be announced. One point is given as a point less than the time given point. In addition, in continuous effects triggered by weak cherries and weak watermelons, predictions of favorable results are made in the weapon selection effects, and if the prediction is correct, points will be given more than normal correct answers. 3 points are given as a large number of points, and prediction with an unfavorable result notification is performed, and if the prediction is correct, 1 point is given as a point less than the points given for normal correct answers. do.

The same applies to the battle effect. As shown in FIG. 96, in the continuous effect triggered by the strong cherry, the prediction that the unfavorable result will be notified is performed in the battle effect, and if the prediction is correct, , 2 points are given as more points than the normal correct answer (1 point), and a prediction of an advantageous result is made, and if the prediction is correct, the points are given more than the normal correct answer. 0 points are given (no points are given) as less points. In addition, in the continuous production triggered by weak cherries and weak watermelons, predictions with favorable results are made in the battle production, and if the prediction is correct, more points are given than normal correct answers. 2 points are given as , and prediction with non-advantageous result notification is performed, and when the prediction is correct, 0 points are given as less points than normal correct points given.

As described above, by setting the weighting when the prediction is correct in the continuous performance that is difficult to be correct as the point given when the prediction is correct, it is possible to encourage people to challenge the prediction in the continuous performance that is difficult to predict. It is possible to increase the interest of the prediction game. In other words, in situations such as low cherry and low watermelon, where it is unlikely that a continuous effect will result in an advantageous result notification, by challenging the prediction of an advantageous result notification, there is an expectation that it will result in an advantageous result notification. It is possible to enjoy the continuous performance with feeling. In addition, in a situation where it is easy to predict that an advantageous result will be announced regardless of the content of the performance, such as a strong cherry, by making the player challenge to predict that an unfavorable result will be announced, it is possible to temporarily Even in the case where the performance is a non-advantageous result notification and the CZ mode shift lottery is not won, it is possible to alleviate the feeling of disappointment.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, a case will be described in which, in a situation where a continuous effect is being performed, a game result that can trigger a continuous effect is obtained again. More specifically, in a situation where a continuous effect is being performed based on the winning of a predetermined transitional opportunity, if the predetermined transitional opportunity is won again, the continuous effect may be rewritten.

The rewriting of the above-mentioned continuous effect is performed by outputting a precursor command from the main control device 101 again by winning a predetermined transition opportunity in a situation where the continuous effect as a pseudo precursor mode is being performed based on the winning of a predetermined transition trigger. Occurs when is done. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing continuous effect setting processing in this modified example.

In the continuous effect setting process in this modified example, it is determined whether or not the portent command or the pseudo portent command is received in step S3801, and if received, the process proceeds to step S3802. It should be noted that the case where the rewriting of the continuous effect occurs is the case where it is determined in step S3801 that the portent command has been received. At step S3802, a chance effect setting process is performed, at step S3803, a process of inputting a value corresponding to the current precursor game number to the continuous effect counter is executed, and at step S3804, a continuous effect flag is set. In addition, since the continuous effect flag is already set when the rewriting of the continuous effect is performed, the state is maintained in step S3804. Incidentally, the processing of steps S3801 to S3804 is the same as the processing of steps S3001 to S3004.

In step S3805, it is determined whether or not the pseudo precursor flag is set. As described above, when the continuous effect is rewritten, the pseudo precursor flag has already been set, and an affirmative determination is made in step S3805, the process proceeds to step S3808, and reselection processing is executed. After that, in step S3809, it is determined whether or not it is a pseudo precursor command, and if it is a precursor command, the pseudo precursor flag is cleared in step S3810, thereby rewriting the continuous effect. In the continuous effect setting process of this modified example, the other processes are the same as the continuous effect setting process in the first embodiment, except that the reselection process in step S3808 is added.

That is, the process of step S3810 is a process for rewriting the continuous effect, and by clearing the pseudo precursor flag, the subsequent effect data setting process (step S3015, step S3017, step S3816 and step S3818) is performed. It is modified so that it is performed by the main effect table for signs instead of the effect table for pseudo signs, and the continuous effect ends with the notification of the advantageous result.

The re-selection process of step S3808 is a process for enabling a second prediction game when a prediction game has already been played by operating the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88. FIG. That is, in the first embodiment, once the prediction game is performed, the second prediction game is not allowed. allow.

In the reselection process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 99(a), first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not any selection operation completion flag is set. If any selection operation completion flag is set, the process advances to step S3902 to execute processing for notifying that reselection is possible on the auxiliary display section 65 .

The reselection possibility notification is notification for letting the player know that the second prediction game is permitted when the continuous effect is rewritten. For example, as shown in FIG. 99(b), the auxiliary display section 65 displays "Chance for re-selection!!", and notifies the player of the selection whether or not to re-select. As a selection notification as to whether or not to reselect, the "YES" icon and the "NO" icon are alternately highlighted at a predetermined cycle, and the effect switch 66 is operated at the timing of the highlighting. , it is preferable to select whether or not to reselect.

In step S3903, it is determined whether or not reselection has been selected by the reselection notification. In the above configuration, for example, when the effect switch 66 is operated at the timing when the "YES" icon is highlighted, affirmative determination is made in step S3903, and the "NO" icon is highlighted. When operation of production switch 66 is done at the timing where it is, negative decision is done with step S3903.

If a negative determination is made in step S3903, that is, if a selection is made not to reselect, the process advances to step S3904 to execute a process of setting the already set correct answer points to four times, End the reselection process. That is, for example, in a situation where the points given for correct answers are set as 3 points, if a re-election of a transition triggering role that can cause rewriting of continuous effects occurs, if reselection is not performed, the points given for correct answers will be reduced. Makes 12 points.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, that is, if a selection for reselection is made, the process advances to step S3905 to execute processing for clearing the already set awarded points for correct answers. After that, in step S3906, a process of setting the points given for correct answers at the time of selection to three times the normal points is executed. Specifically, as shown in the first embodiment, the correct answer is 3 points for the 1st to 3rd games, 2 points for the 4th to 6th games, and 1 point for the 7th to 9th games. When the point to be given is set, the process of step S3906 is performed to obtain 9 points in the 1st to 3rd games, 6 points in the 4th to 6th games, and 3 points in the 7th to 9th games. Points will be set for correct answers. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that reselection has been selected is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and when the operation of the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is specified in the selection correspondence processing, the flag It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which points given for correct answers are set differently depending on the presence or absence of . After executing the process of step S3906, the reselection process ends.

If it is determined in step S3901 that none of the selection operation completion flags has been set, the process advances to step S3907. In step S3907, processing is executed to set the correct answer award points at the time of selection to double the normal points. Specifically, 6 points are set for the 1st to 3rd games, 4 points are set for the 4th to 6th games, and 2 points are set for the 7th to 9th games. In this case, for example, when there is a chance of re-selection in the various flag storage area 183a, a flag indicating that the selection operation has not yet been performed is set, and in the selection handling process, the first selection switch 87 or the operation of the second selection switch 88 may be configured such that points given for correct answers are set differently depending on the presence or absence of the flag. After executing the process of step S3907, the reselection process ends.

As described above, when a second transition trigger role winning occurs during the execution of the continuous effect, in the prediction game of the continuous effect, by configuring to allow the second prediction game, for example, it is predicted as a non-advantageous result notification However, it is possible to meet the needs of correcting the prediction when, for example, winning of a transition triggering role with a high possibility of announcing an advantageous result occurs.

In this case, early selection operation is recommended by setting points given for correct answers so that the player is more advantageous to the player if the prediction game is not played again than if the prediction game is not played. In the game, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player who performed the early selection operation.

Furthermore, in the case where the second transition trigger role winning occurs during the execution of the continuous performance, if the selection operation has not been performed yet, the correct answer is made more disadvantageous to the player than when the selection operation has already been performed. By setting the time grant points, it is possible to ensure the superiority of the player who performed the early selection operation.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, when the result prediction in the continuous effect is correct, the continuous effect may end in the middle. FIG. 100(a) is a flow chart showing part of the selection handling process in this modified example.

In the operation corresponding processing in this modified example, it is determined in step S4001 whether or not the operation of the selection switches 87 and 88 is during the continuous effect. If it is determined that the continuous effect is being performed, it is determined in step S4002 whether or not the selection switches 87 and 88 have already been operated in the continuous effect.

If it is determined in step S4002 that the current operation of the selection switches 87 and 88 is the first operation in the continuous effect, the process proceeds to step S4003. In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the first selection switch 87 has been operated. If it is the first selection switch 87, then in step S4004 a process of setting a first selection operation completion flag is executed. If it is determined that the second selection switch 88 was operated instead of the first selection switch 87, a second selection operation completed flag is set in step S4005. These steps S4001 to S4005 are the same as the steps S3201 to S3205.

In this modification, it is determined that the operation of the second selection switch 88 is performed in step S4003, and it is predicted that the current continuous effect is a continuous effect in which a non-advantageous result is reported, and a second selection operation completed flag is performed. The processing after setting is different. That is, after the process of step S4005 is executed, in this modification, it is determined whether or not the prediction that the continuous effect will be the non-advantageous result notification is correct in step S4006. More specifically, when the pseudo flag is set, it is determined in step S4006 that the prediction is correct. When it determines with it being a prediction correct answer, in step S4007, the completion|finish lottery process of continuous production|presentation is performed. This process is a lottery process of whether or not the current prediction operation is correct, and based on the correct operation, the continuous effect being executed is terminated without being performed to the end. In this modified example, the probability of winning in the end lottery process is set to 1/2, but such probability is arbitrary. For example, the probability of winning may be changed according to the value of the continuous performance counter, and a configuration may be adopted in which it is difficult to win the end lottery when a prediction operation that is a correct prediction is performed at the end of the continuous performance.

In step S4008, it is determined whether or not the lottery has been won in the ending lottery process in step S4007. In the case of winning, in step S4009, a process of clearing the continuation flag and the pseudo flag is executed. Then, in step S4010, a process of resetting the continuous effect counter to 0 is executed. Through the processing of these steps S4009 and S4010, the continuous effect being executed ends without reaching the final game. In addition, for example, when the processing of step S4009 or step S4010 is executed, the above point corresponding processing is activated, and points given for correct answer set based on the prediction that it is a continuous effect with a non-advantageous result notification is preferably provided.

After the processing of step S4004 or step S4010 is executed, or if a negative determination is made in step S4006 or step S4008, in steps S3206 to S3212 above, according to the number of games at the time of operation, points given for correct answers are set. conduct.

For example, in a continuous effect in which a non-advantageous result is reported, as shown in FIG. A case where the selection switches 87 and 88 are operated when the character attacks is performed will be described. This operation is the operation of the first selection switch 87, and if it is predicted that the current continuous performance is a continuous performance in which an advantageous result is announced, this prediction is incorrect, and the first selection switch 87 is operated in the first place. If so, the process proceeds to step S4004 in step S4003, so the process for ending the continuous effect (steps S4009 and S4010) is not performed. If it does so, the continuation production of the above-mentioned continuation counter will be performed.

On the other hand, if it is predicted that this operation is the operation of the second selection switch 88 and that the current continuous effect is the continuous effect of notifying the non-advantageous result, this prediction is correct. Then, when winning is obtained through the continuous effect lottery, a process for terminating the continuous effect is performed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 100(b), the presentation during the continuous presentation is switched to correct notification that the prediction is correct. In the correct answer notification, for example, the correct answer sound is generated with "ding-pong", and the message "returns to the normal effect from the next game" is displayed to explain that the continuous effect will end in the middle. will be

If the above-described continuous effect is a continuous effect of notifying an advantageous result and the continuous effect is predicted to be an unfavorable result notification, the second selection switch 88 is operated. However, this prediction is an incorrect answer as described above, and if so, a negative determination is made in step S4006, and in this case also, the process for ending the continuous effect is not performed. Further, even if the second selection switch 88 is operated during the continuous performance to inform the non-advantageous result and the prediction is correct, if the winning is not won in the continuous performance end lottery, The continuous performance is performed to the end without ending in the middle.

As described above, if the prediction is correct, the continuous performance being executed may end in the middle, so that even if the result of the continuous performance is recognized, It is possible to eliminate the absurdity of being able to see the continuous performance (until the result is announced). Moreover, by doing so, it is possible to motivate the prediction operation at an early stage.

Even when the prediction is correct, when the prediction in the continuous performance for notifying the advantageous result is correct, the continuous performance is not terminated in the middle and is performed to the end. In the continuous effect which becomes the notification of the advantageous result, as the notification of the advantageous result, for example, the CZ mode transition winning (advantageous section winning) is notified, and then the CZ mode is shifted to. , the transition to the CZ mode can be made early. In other words, the CZ mode transition game differs depending on the player's predictive operation, and the predictive operation can affect the payout rate. In that respect, as in the above configuration, in the continuous effect that will be the notification of the advantageous result, even if the prediction is correct, the continuous effect is performed until the end. It is possible to provide new fun such as.

Even if the prediction is correct in the continuous performance with the notification of the non-advantageous result, the continuous performance is continued when the lottery for ending the continuous performance is not won. By doing so, it becomes difficult to understand the success or failure of the prediction of the continuous performance, and it becomes possible to entertain the continuous performance to the end.

<Second embodiment>
In the above-described first embodiment, the point given for correct answer is set based on the game in which the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is operated in the continuous effect, but in the present embodiment, the continuous effect Based on the performance generated in , set the points to be given at the time of correct answer. FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing part of the continuous effect setting process in this embodiment.

In the continuous effect setting process in the present embodiment, a specified correct answer point is set in the continuous effect start game, and when setting the effect of each game of the continuous effect, the specified correct answer is given according to the effect. Subtract from points.

That is, when the affirmative determination is made in the above step S3012 and it is determined that it is time to execute the continuous effect, it is determined in step S4101 whether or not the current game is the start game of the continuous effect. More specifically, in step S4101, it is determined whether the continuous effect counter is 10 or not. If it is determined in step S4101 that it is the start game, a process of setting 10 points to be given for correct answer is executed in step S4102.

When a negative determination is made in step S4101, or after the processing of step S4102 is executed, the effect data setting processing is executed in steps S4103 to S4107. This process is the same as the process of steps S3013 to S3017, and sets the effect of the current game based on whether or not the continuous effect is the sign mode and the number of games of the continuous effect.

After executing the process of step S4105 or step S4107, it is determined in step S4108 whether any selection operation completed flag is set. If none of the selection operation completed flags have been set and a prediction operation has not yet been performed, the flow advances to step S4109 to execute processing for obtaining calculation point tables from the various table storage area 182a. Then, in step S4110, whether the current continuous effect is an advantageous result notification or a non-advantageous result notification, the current effect content set in step S4105 or step S4107, and the calculation acquired in step S4109 Based on the point table, the addition/decrease processing of points given for correct answers is executed. Incidentally, when the prediction operation is performed in step S4108 as described above, the addition/subtraction processing in step S4110 is not performed. The points to be given are set as points to be given when a correct answer is given in the current prediction game.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 102, the value to be subtracted from the correctly given point is set according to the option of each effect during the continuous effect for the calculation point table. For example, in the enemy character selection effect, if "zombie" is selected and the current effect data setting process is performed, in the continuous effect that ends with the notification of the advantageous result, 3 points are set to be subtracted from the points given for correct answers. It is set so that 1 is subtracted from the points given for correct answers in the continuous performance that ends as a non-advantageous result notification. On the other hand, in the enemy character selection effect, if "Tank" is selected and the current effect data setting process is performed, in the continuous effect that ends with an advantageous result notification, 1 is set to be subtracted from the points awarded for correct answers. It is set so that 3 is subtracted from the points given for correct answers in the continuous performance that ends as a non-advantageous result notification.

In other words, in the continuous production of the advantageous result notification, if an option with a high expectation of the advantageous result notification is selected, the correct answer is higher than when an option with a lower expectation of the advantageous result notification is selected. The subtraction number is increased from the given points. In addition, in the continuous production of non-advantageous result notification, if an option with a high expectation of non-advantageous result notification (low expectation of advantageous result notification) is selected, the expectation of non-advantageous result notification is The number of points to be subtracted from the points given for correct answers is made larger than when a lower option (with a higher degree of expectation for favorable result notification) is selected.

Note that the above subtraction is performed in the third game when the enemy character notification is performed in the enemy character selection effect.

The same is true for the weapon selection effect and the battle effect. In the continuous effect, the number of subtractions is increased when an option with a high degree of expectation for informing a non-advantageous result is selected. In addition, in the weapon selection effect and the battle effect, the subtraction from the points given for correct answers is performed in the sixth game when the selected weapon is notified in the weapon selection effect, and in the battle effect, the number of attacks of the allied characters is performed. is set so that the subtraction is performed in the ninth game after the eighth game in which is determined.

For example, in a continuous effect with an advantageous result notification, if the combination of options for each effect is "zombie" → "machine gun" → "ally attack 2 times", at the time of subtraction in the ninth game One point is given when the answer is correct. On the other hand, in the continuous effect that informs the non-advantageous result, similarly, if "Zombie" → "Machine gun" → "Friendly attack 2 times", the point given for correct answer at the time of subtraction in the ninth game is 7 points. As already explained, when a combination of the above options is selected, the possibility of being notified of an advantageous result is overwhelmingly higher than the possibility of being notified of an unfavorable result. By setting the table, it is possible to increase the points given for correct answers when the prediction is correct when the probability is low, and to give fewer points when the prediction is correct when the possibility is high. It becomes possible.

Also, for example, in a continuous effect with an advantageous result notification, if the combination of options for each effect is "zombie"→"hammer"→"1 friendly attack", the subtraction is performed at the ninth game. 4 points are given when the answer is correct. On the other hand, when the combination of options for each effect is "Tank" → "Hammer" → "One ally attack" in the continuous effect with the advantageous result notification, the subtraction is performed in the ninth game. At this point, the points given for a correct answer are 6 points. In other words, depending on the combination of options, even if the number of games is the same for the same advantageous result notification, the points awarded for correct answers will differ.

Thus, in the present embodiment, not only the number of games in the continuous effect, but also by varying the points given for a correct answer depending on the content of the effect in each game in the continuous effect, for example, an effect that is easy to predict occurs. In a situation where the continuous performance is not played, the points are increased even at the end of the continuous performance, and conversely, in a situation where a performance that is easy to predict occurs, the points are decreased even at the beginning of the continuous performance.

If any of the selection operation completed flag is set in step S4108, or after executing the processing of step S4110, in steps S4111 to S4113, in the same manner as in steps S3018 to S3020, continuous effect After the end processing is executed, the continuous effect setting processing is ended.

Next, the processing for setting the operation-responsive effect in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 103 .

In the setting process of the operation corresponding effect in this embodiment, in steps S4201 to S4206, similarly to steps S3701 to S3706 in the first embodiment, setting of the operation corresponding effect for the cut-in effect in the continuous effect is performed. conduct. Then, in step S4207, it is determined whether or not any selection operation completion flag is set, and if it is set, the operation corresponding effect setting processing is terminated. If none of the selected operation flags have been set, the calculation point table is obtained in step S4208, and the processing for adding or subtracting points given for correct answers is executed in step S4209. finish.

As shown in FIG. 104, in the calculation point table for the operation corresponding effect, in the continuous effect in which the advantageous result is announced, when the strong cut-in effect is selected, the number of points subtracted from the correct answer increases, and the weak cut-in effect increases. When the effect is selected, it is set so that the number of points to be subtracted from the points given for correct answers is reduced. is set to subtract 2 in , and to subtract -2 in weak cut-in, that is, to add 2. On the other hand, in the continuous effect that results in non-advantageous result notification, if the strong cut-in effect is selected, the number of subtractions from the points given for correct answers will decrease, and if the weak cut-in effect is selected, the points given for correct answers will be reduced. More specifically, in this embodiment, for example, in the first to third games, 2 is added in the strong cut-in effect, and the weak cut-in effect is added. is set to subtract 2.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the effect switch 66 is operated when an operation instruction effect for a cut-in effect occurs, no cut-in effect occurs is also set as a choice of effect. Then, when such a non-occurrence option is selected, regardless of the number of games of continuous effect or whether it is an advantageous result notification or an unfavorable result notification, 1 is uniformly added to the points given for correct answers. is set to

In addition, in the present embodiment, a premier cut-in effect is set as an option with a significantly lower selection rate than other options (for example, 1/100 of the strong cut-in effect) as a cut-in effect. When the premium cut-in effect option is selected, a value corresponding to the number of consecutive effect games is added to the correct answer points, regardless of whether the result is an advantageous result notification or an unfavorable result notification. is set to

If a negative determination is made in step S4201, processing for setting an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the current operation instruction effect is performed in steps S4210 and S4211. The processing in steps S4210 and S4211 is the same as the processing in steps S3707 and S3708 described above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the points given for correct answers are adjusted according to the effects that occur in the continuous effects, and points given for correct answers are added when the first selection switch 87 or the second selection switch 88 is operated. Since the points are the points given when the prediction is correct, the result of the continuous performance is predicted from the generated performance, and the points to be given when the prediction is correct are predicted from the generated performance. A game is added to improve the interest of the prediction game.

In addition, points are subtracted when an easy-to-predict performance occurs, and points are subtracted or added when an unpredictable performance occurs, compared to the easily-predictable performance. The occurrence of an effect that is easy to perform is preferable from the viewpoint of increasing the possibility that the prediction will be correct, but is not preferable from the viewpoint of wanting to obtain a large number of points. In this way, by clearly setting advantages and disadvantages from a plurality of points of view for one presentation, it is possible to suitably enhance the presentation effect of the game presentation.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, in the calculation point table, the subtraction value is changed when an unfavorable result is reported. FIG. 105 shows a calculation point table in this modified example.

As described above, in the continuous production, for example, when "zombie" is selected as the enemy character or "machine gun" is selected as the weapon to be used, the continuous production may be an advantageous result notification instead of an unfavorable result notification. become more sexual. Further, when a "tank" is selected as an enemy character or a "hammer" is selected as a weapon to be used, the possibility that the continuous effect will be an unadvantageous result announcement rather than an advantageous result announcement increases. The balance between the easiness and difficulty of predicting non-advantageous result notification and advantageous result notification is adjusted by the balance of these performance options.

In this modified example, as shown in FIG. 105, in the continuous effect of non-advantageous result notification, the more likely the option is to be predicted as advantageous result notification, the more the number of subtraction points from the correct answer is given, and the more likely it is to be predicted as non-advantageous result notification. The number of points to be subtracted from the points given for correct answers is reduced for choices that are more likely to be given. Specifically, in the above-described second embodiment, when "zombie" is selected in the continuous effect in which the non-advantageous result is reported, 1 is subtracted from the points given for correct answer, and "tank" is selected. In this modified example, 3 is subtracted for "zombie" and 1 is subtracted for "tank". In addition, in the second embodiment, 1 is subtracted for "machine gun" and 3 is subtracted for "hammer" in the continuous effect of notifying an unfavorable result, but in this modification, "machine gun" Subtract 3 for "Hammer" and 1 for "Hammer". The same applies to the battle effect, and the relationship between the subtraction number and the options in the second embodiment is changed to be the opposite relationship.

For example, in a continuous effect with a non-advantageous result notification, when "zombie" → "machine gun" → "ally attack twice" is selected respectively, in the second embodiment, the number of points subtracted from the correct answer is The total is 3, and 7 points are given for correct answers when a non-advantageous result is predicted during battle production. On the other hand, in this modified example, when each of the above options is selected, the total number of subtractions from the points given for correct answers is 9, and it is predicted that an unfavorable result will be announced during the battle production. In case of correct answer, the given point is 1. On the other hand, in the continuous effect that informs the non-advantageous result, when "tank" → "hammer" → "ally 0 times attack" are selected respectively, in the second embodiment, the number of points subtracted from the correct answer is The total is 9, and 1 point is given for a correct answer when a non-advantageous result is predicted during battle production. On the other hand, in this modification, when each of the above options is selected, the total number of subtractions from the points given for correct answers is 3, and it is predicted that an unfavorable result will be announced during the battle production. In this case, 7 points are given when the answer is correct.

In other words, in the present modification, when the production of an option that is difficult to predict that it will be a non-advantageous result notification occurs, instead of giving more points when the prediction is correct, the non-advantageous result notification In the case where the effect of an option whose outcome is easy to predict occurs, many points will be given if the prediction is correct. In other words, the case where the effect of the option that is easy to predict that the non-advantageous result notification is generated occurs, in other words, the case where the expectation for the advantageous result notification is extremely low. In other words, in the game property aiming for the advantageous section (CZ mode) transition lottery, the degree of attention to the continuous effect is extremely low, and in such a case, it is correct to predict that the non-advantageous result will be announced. Then, by providing a configuration in which a large number of points are given, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the expectation of winning the advantageous section transition lottery by another privilege such as setting value suggestion.

<Modification 2>
Another modification of the calculation point table is shown in FIG.

The calculation point table in this modified example is set so that the number of points to be subtracted from the points given for correct answer is increased in the subsequent effects in the continuous effects. Specifically, for example, in a continuous effect that announces an advantageous result, 1 is subtracted when a "zombie" is selected as an enemy character, while a subtraction is performed when a "ninja" or "tank" is selected. not. Also, when "machine gun" is selected as the weapon to be used, 2 is subtracted, "knife" is subtracted by 1, and "hammer" is not subtracted. Then, when "ally attack twice" is selected as the battle effect, 3 is subtracted, "ally attack once" is subtracted by 2, and "ally attack 0 times" is subtracted by 1. is set. By doing so, it is possible to further emphasize the structure in which the earlier the prediction is made in the continuous presentation, the more points are given for correct answers.

Note that in FIG. 106, as in Modification 1 above, in the continuous effect of non-advantageous result notification, the number of subtractions increases as the effect of options that are likely to be predicted as advantageous result notification increases. However, as in the above-described second embodiment, in the continuous effect with the non-advantageous result notification, the more the non-advantageous result notification and the effect of the option that is more likely to be predicted, the more the number of subtractions. In the configuration in which the number of subtractions increases, it may be applied to a configuration in which the number of subtractions increases toward the rear side of the effect.

<Third Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the information on the prediction operation performed in the continuous performance is stored, and the parameter of the continuous performance is corrected based on the stored information.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing selection handling processing in this embodiment.

In step S4301, it is determined whether or not a continuous effect is being performed, and in step S4302, it is determined whether or not any selection operation completed flag has been set. When the continuous effect is not being performed or when any of the selection operation completed flags is set, the selection handling process is terminated as it is. If the prediction operation this time is the first prediction operation in the continuous effect, in step S4303, it is determined whether or not the first selection switch 87 has been operated. sets the first selection operation completed flag in step S4304. After that, in this embodiment, in step S4305, a process of adding 1 to the first selection counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The first selection counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the number of effective operations of the first selection switch 87 (operations specified as prediction operations in the continuous effect).

In the following step S4306, it is determined whether or not the current continuous effect is the continuous effect of informing the advantageous result, and the prediction operation specified this time was correct. If the answer is correct, a process of adding 1 to the first correct answer counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The first correct counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the number of times the predictive operation is correct when the predictive operation is performed in the continuous effect for notifying the advantageous result.

If it is determined in step S4303 that the second selection switch 88 has been operated, a second selection operation completed flag is set in step S4308. After that, in this embodiment, in step S4309, a process of adding 1 to the second selection counter provided in the various counter areas 183b is executed. The second selection counter corresponds to the first selection counter, and is a counter for the CPU 181 to specify the number of effective operations of the second selection switch 88 .

In the subsequent step S4310, it is determined whether or not the current continuous effect is the continuous effect of notifying the non-advantageous result, and the prediction operation specified this time was correct. If the answer is correct, a process of adding 1 to the second correct answer counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed. The second correct counter corresponds to the above-described first correct counter, and is used by the CPU 181 to specify the number of times a prediction operation is performed in a continuous effect in which an unfavorable result is reported and the prediction operation is correct. is a counter.

If a negative determination is made in step S4306 or step S4310, or after executing the processing in step S4307 or step S4311, in steps S4312 to S4318, processing for setting correct answer points according to the number of games in continuous production to run. Such processing is the same as the processing of steps S3206 to S3212 described above.

Next, processing for adjusting parameters of each effect using each selection counter and each correct counter will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this embodiment, the effect adjustment process performed by the CPU 181 of the display control device 81 is set as the adjustment process. The effect adjustment process is executed, for example, in other processes (step S2312) of the effect setting process.

In the effect adjustment process, first, in step S4401, it is determined whether or not the effect adjustment condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the effect adjustment condition is that the selection switches 87 and 88 have been operated a predetermined number of times (20 times, 30 times, 40 times, and thereafter 10 times each). Specifically, in step S4401, the total number of each selection counter (total of the first selection counter and the second selection counter) is grasped, and when the total number is a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the effect adjustment condition is established. . If the performance adjustment condition is not established, the performance adjustment processing is terminated as it is. If the effect adjustment condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S4402.

In step S4402, the correct answer rate calculated from the first selection counter and the first correct counter, that is, the correct answer in the case of predicting that the first selection switch 87 will be operated and continuous effects will be performed to notify an advantageous result. The correct answer rate calculated from the ratio, the second selection counter, and the second correct counter, that is, the correct answer in the case of predicting that the second selection switch 88 is operated and the continuous effect that informs the non-advantageous result is performed. It is determined whether or not the correct answer rate of either the rate or the rate is 70% or more as the first adjustment condition. That is, it is determined whether or not the correct answer rate for any result notification is 70% or more, and the selection rate of the option of each effect is a parameter that facilitates prediction (easily predicts the result).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4402, the process proceeds to step S4403. In step S4403, it is determined whether or not the parameter of each effect of the continuous effect to be the advantageous result notification is easy to predict. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4403, in step S4404, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effects that will result in advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is reduced (for example, 5%), and the selection rate on the weak effect side is reduced. Processing is performed to adjust the selection rate of options to a high value (eg, 5%). The options on the strong effect side are options with a relatively high degree of expectation for victory. , corresponds to "ally attack twice". In addition, the options on the weak effect side are options with a relatively low degree of expectation of victory, for example, "tank" corresponds to the enemy character selection effect, "hammer" corresponds to the weapon selection effect, and battle effects. corresponds to "attack allies 0 times".

After executing the process of step S4404, it progresses to step S4405 and determines whether the parameter of each production|presentation of continuous production|presentation used as non-advantageous result notification is easy to predict. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4405, in step S4406, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effects that result in non-advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is increased (for example, 5%), and the selection rate on the weak effect side is increased. is adjusted so as to lower the selection rate of the option (for example, 5%).

If a negative determination is made in step S4403, in step S4407, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effects that result in non-advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is increased (for example, 5%), and the weak effect The selection rate of the option on the side is adjusted to be low (for example, 5%).
The processing in step S4407 is the same as the processing in step S4406.

After executing the process of step S4406 or step S4407 and after making a negative determination in step S4405, the process proceeds to step S4408. In step S4408, the accuracy rate when the first selection switch 87 is operated to predict that it is a continuous effect of notifying the advantageous result, and the continuous effect of operating the second selection switch 88 to notify the advantageous result It is determined whether or not the correct answer rate in the case where the prediction is made is 30% or less as the second adjustment condition. That is, it is determined whether or not the correct answer rate for any result notification is 30% or less, and the selection rate of the option of each effect is a parameter that is difficult to predict (difficult to predict the result). If a negative determination is made in step S4408, the production adjustment process is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S4402, the process advances to step S4409. In step S4409, similarly to step S4408, it is determined whether or not the selection rate of the option for each effect is a parameter that is difficult to predict (hard to predict the result).

If an affirmative determination is made in step S4408 or step S4409, the process proceeds to step S4410. In step S4410, it is determined whether or not the parameter of each effect of the continuous effect that becomes the notification of the advantageous result is difficult to predict. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4410, in step S4411, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effect that will be the advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is high (for example, 5%), and the selection rate on the weak effect side is increased. Processing is performed to adjust the selection rate of options to be low (for example, 5%).

After executing the process of step S4411, it progresses to step S4412 and determines whether the parameter of each production|presentation of the continuous production|presentation used as non-advantageous result notification becomes difficult to predict. If an affirmative determination is made in step S4412, in step S4413, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effects that result in non-advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is reduced (for example, 5%), and the selection rate on the weak effect side is reduced. is adjusted so as to increase the selection rate of the option (for example, 5%).

If a negative determination is made in step S4410, in step S4414, among the selection rates of the options of the continuous effects that result in non-advantageous result notification, the selection rate of the option on the strong effect side is reduced (for example, 5%), and the weak effect The selection rate of the option on the side is adjusted to be higher (for example, 5%).
The processing of step S4414 is the same as the processing of step S4413.

After executing the process of step S4413 or step S4414, or after making a negative determination in step S4409 or step S4412, the effect adjustment process is terminated as it is.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the information of the prediction operation performed in the continuous effect is stored as each selection counter and each correct counter, and based on the stored information, parameters such as the selection rate of each option in the continuous effect to fix. That is, the information of the predicted operation performed by the player is fed back to the continuous performance, and the continuous performance is readjusted. By doing so, in the game property of predicting the notification of the result of the continuous performance, the occurrence of the inconvenience that the prediction is too easy or the prediction is difficult can be avoided by the operation of the player. can be done. Therefore, the predictive game can be favorably performed.

In particular, it is preferable that prediction is easy in the early stage of the game, such as a predictive game, which is difficult to achieve unless the player understands which result notification the effect contents of each option in the continuous effect are likely to lead to. it is conceivable that. On the other hand, as the prediction game is repeated and the degree of understanding of the game improves, there is a high possibility that prediction will become easier. It is possible that the rate will drop. Moreover, the degree of understanding changes depending on the skill level and habits of the player. Depending on the design, there may be a possibility that the performance effect as designed cannot be expected.

In that respect, as in the above configuration, the predicted operation of the player is fed back to each parameter, so that the performance can be adjusted according to the skill level and habits of the player, and a more suitable performance effect can be expected. It becomes possible to

<How production is adjusted and its parameters>
Figures 109 to 112 show the parameters of each option when effect adjustment is performed.

In this example, at the start of the game, as shown in FIG. 109, as a parameter for each option, the ratio of the strong effect to the weak effect in the case of the advantageous result notification is 40 times the selection rate, and the non-advantageous result notification is selected. This shows the case where the ratio of the strong effect to the weak effect in the case is set to be a selection rate of 1/1.6. In this case, until the total number of prediction operations reaches 20, the correct prediction rate when announcing an advantageous result is about 80%, and the correct prediction rate when announcing an unfavorable result is about 13%. is a parameter with a low degree of prediction difficulty, whereas it is estimated that the parameter at the time of non-advantageous result notification is a parameter with a high degree of prediction difficulty.

FIG. 110 shows the parameter of each option when the selection rate parameter of each option is adjusted as a result of the performance adjustment process described above, and the total number of prediction operations reaches 40 times. In this case, until the total number of prediction operations reaches 40, the prediction accuracy rate when an advantageous result is reported is about 83%, and the prediction accuracy rate when an unfavorable result is reported is about 29%. It is presumed that the time is a parameter with a low prediction difficulty level, while the prediction difficulty level is a high parameter with respect to the non-advantageous result notification time.

FIG. 111 shows the parameter of each option when the selection rate parameter of each option is adjusted as a result of the performance adjustment process described above, and the total number of prediction operations reaches 60 times. In this case, until the total number of prediction operations reaches 60, the prediction accuracy rate when an advantageous result is reported is about 75%, and the prediction accuracy rate when an unfavorable result is reported is about 30%. Regarding the time, it is a parameter with a low prediction difficulty, while it is estimated that it is a parameter with a high prediction difficulty regarding the non-advantageous result notification, but compared to the above cases of 20 times and 40 times As a result, it can be seen that the state in which the prediction accuracy rate is too high or too low is eliminated, albeit gradually.

FIG. 112 shows the parameter of each option when the selection rate parameter of each option is adjusted as a result of the performance adjustment processing described above, and the total number of prediction operations reaches 80 times. In this case, until the total number of prediction operations reaches 80, the prediction accuracy rate when an advantageous result is reported is about 64%, and the prediction accuracy rate when an unfavorable result is reported is about 44%. It can be seen that the prediction difficulty of is a good parameter.

FIG. 113 shows the relationship between each prediction accuracy rate and an index indicating the fun of the prediction operation.

In the present embodiment, as an index indicating the fun of the prediction operation, the average value of the number of games during the continuous effect when the prediction operation is performed when the advantageous result is notified, and the number of times the prediction operation is performed when the unfavorable result is notified It is expressed using the difference (absolute value) between the average value of the number of games in each case. The average value of the number of games in which the prediction operation was performed at the time of each result notification indicates that the smaller the value, the earlier the prediction operation was performed, and the larger the value, the less time the prediction operation was performed. ing. Then, the larger the difference in the average number of games of the prediction operation in each result notification, the easier it was to predict one result notification, and the other result notification was difficult to predict. It is understood that the smaller the difference, the smaller the difference in prediction difficulty. In other words, it can be said that the smaller the difference, the more troublesome the player will be in predicting which result will be reported, and the parameter will allow the player to fully enjoy the prediction game.

In that respect, the difference in the average number of games of the prediction operation is about 6.2 games with the parameter when the total number of prediction operations is 20, and the difference is large, that is, the interest of the prediction game is low. I understand. On the other hand, with the parameters at the time of 40 times, the difference in the average number of games of the prediction operation is about 4.2 games, which is smaller than the difference at the time of 20 times, increasing the interest of the prediction game. I understand that. With the parameters at the 60th time, the difference in the average number of games of the prediction operation was about 1.8 games, which was even smaller than the difference at the 40th time, and the interest in the prediction game was further enhanced. Recognize. Then, with the parameters at the time of 80 times, the difference in the average number of games of the prediction operation is about 0.9 games, which further enhances the interest of the prediction game.

Here, with parameters up to 70 times, the difference in the average number of games of predictive manipulations gradually decreases, while from 70 times to 80 times, the difference increases. In other words, by adjusting and improving the parameters as described above, the difference in the average number of games can be reduced and the interest of the prediction game can be enhanced. Then, by repeating adjustments and improvements, the interest becomes more than a certain level. The parameters adjusted at the time of the 70th time are shown in FIG. 2 times or less). On the other hand, the selection rate of the weak effect in the case of the non-advantageous result notification is about 1.6 times (1.5 times or more, 2 times or less) of the strong effect. Further, the selection rate of the strong effect in the case of the advantageous result notification is about 2.4 times (2 times or more, 2.5 times or less) of the selection rate of the strong effect in the case of the non-advantageous result notification. In other words, by setting the selection rate of each option to these values, it can be said that a more interesting predictive game is realized.

<Other embodiments>
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the descriptions of the above-described embodiments and modifications, and may be implemented as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications, or may be partially or entirely combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments and modifications. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or part of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments and modifications. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exhibited) of each configuration to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration made up of a combination of embodiments and modifications, or a combination of some or all of them may be applied.

(1) In each of the above-described embodiments, the playability of predicting whether or not the CZ mode will be won based on the fact that the advantageous section transition lottery is performed has been described. It may be configured to predict the result of determination that a privilege different from the game result of each game is given based on, for example, it may be configured to predict the success or failure of the AT mode transition lottery, the VB mode transition lottery, It may be configured to predict the success or failure of the special zone transfer lottery, or may be configured to predict the success or failure of the additional lottery.

(2) Although the CZ mode transition lottery success or failure is predicted, in a lottery in which there are multiple types of winning results, the type of winning result may be predicted. For example, it may be configured to predict the number of additional games at the time of additional winning, or may be configured to predict the presence or absence of transition to the special zone when winning the AT mode transition lottery.

(3) It is configured to predict the success or failure of the CZ mode transition lottery, and if it is predicted that it will be won (continuous performance with an advantageous result notification), the first selection switch 87 is operated, and the non-winning (non-advantageous result notification) Although the second selection switch 88 is operated in the case of the prediction that the player will win the game, the first selection switch 87 may be omitted as long as it is possible to predict that the game will not be won.

(4) Although the first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 are provided and the switches to be operated are differentiated depending on the content of prediction, either of the prediction operations may be performed by a shared switch. For example, in the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like, a selection icon for predicting an advantageous result and a selection icon for predicting an unadvantageous result are displayed, highlighted alternately, and highlighted. When a predetermined operation means is operated at the timing indicated, it is assumed that the result notification of the highlighted side has been predicted, and subsequent processing (such as setting points given for correct answers) is performed. may be

(5) The first selection switch 87 and the second selection switch 88 are operating means exclusively for prediction games, but they may be operating means used for other games, and these first selection switch 87 and second selection switch 88 may be used for other games. As operating means used for other games, the effect switch 66 and each of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be used. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are used, it is preferable that the switches are separated left and right. For example, the left stop switch 42 can be used instead of the first selection switch 87, and the right stop switch 44 can be used instead of the second selection switch 88. good.

(6) The number of games to be continued in the continuous effect, the content of the effect, the types of options and the number of options in each effect are not limited to those described above. For example, as options for enemy characters and weapons to be used, more options than the above three types may be set, or fewer options (two types) may be set.

(7) In the continuous effect, the 1st game to the 3rd game (3), the 4th game to the 6th game (2), the 7th game to the 9th game (1), and the 10th game (0) , different points are given for correct answers, and different numbers of points are subtracted for correct answers. For example, for the 1st to 2nd games, the 3rd to 5th games, the 6th to 8th games, and the 9th to 10th games, different points are given for correct answers, or You may vary the number of subtractions of the given points. In particular, the timing and game before the options in each effect are determined (notified) and the timing and game after the options in each effect are determined (notified), when the prediction is correct It is preferable that the points to be awarded have different configurations.

(8) As the result notification in the continuous effect, an example of the advantageous result notification and the non-advantageous result notification has been explained, but the continuous effect includes the result notification in addition to the advantageous result notification and the non-advantageous result notification. may For example, when a continuous effect occurs during the CZ mode in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, AT mode transition winning notification is performed as an advantageous result notification, and AT mode transition non-winning notification is performed as a non-advantageous result notification. is performed, CZ mode continuation notification is performed as continuation result notification, and CZ mode end notification is performed as non-continuation result notification. You may

(9) In a game that predicts the result notification in a continuous effect, if the prediction is correct, points given for correct answer are given as a privilege, and the cumulative value of the points is the suggestive effect of the set value (special effect at the end of the bonus). Although a configuration has been described in which it is possible to make predictions correctly, it is also possible to employ a configuration in which a setting value suggestive effect is generated each time, without giving or accumulating points given for correct answers as a privilege for correct predictions. In this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the setting value suggestive effect is more likely to occur in situations where more points are set for correct answers, such as when an early prediction operation is performed and the prediction is correct. .

(10) When the prediction is correct, a congratulatory effect may be performed to notify that the prediction is correct and congratulate it, and when the prediction is incorrect, the prediction is incorrect. may be notified and a disappointing effect to arouse the feeling of regret may be performed, or both of these effects may be performed. It is preferable that the congratulatory effect and the regret effect are performed after notification of the result of the continuous effect. However, in the case where the prediction of the notification of the non-advantageous result is correct, in the configuration for ending the continuous effect, the above-mentioned blessing effect may be performed at the end of the continuous effect.

In addition, depending on the type of result notification that the prediction was correct, the presence or absence of the blessing effect, the type, and the content of the effect may be changed. A configuration may be adopted in which the congratulatory notification is not performed when the prediction of the advantageous result notification is correct.

Furthermore, it is possible to give a congratulatory message and give points for correct answer, or to give only a congratulatory message.

(11) Although the points given for correct answers are given at the end game of the continuous effect, they may be given at the time of the prediction operation, or may be given in a game after the end game of the continuous effect. .

(12) A configuration may be adopted in which simultaneous winning of the CZ mode transition winning and the first BB or second BB bonus can occur. Specifically, the CZ mode transition lottery is triggered by the strong cherry overlap 1, which is a duplicate role with the 1BB, the strong cherry overlap 2, which is a double role with the 2BB, and the single roles of the 1BB and 2BB. It may be configured to perform, and even in this case, it may be configured to allow continuous effects to occur. In this case, when the number of precursor games for bonus winning is small (less than 10 games), no continuous performance is generated, and when the number of precursor games is large (10 games or more), continuous performance is generated, and the above prediction game is performed. may be configured to perform

(13) In a configuration that predicts a continuous effect with the possibility of overlapping winning with a bonus, if a result notification other than the result notification in the continuous effect is performed (occurred), such as the appearance of a reach eye. , the continuous effect may be stopped. In this case, if the prediction operation has been performed before the cancellation, the points given for correct answers based on the prediction operation are given as valid, while if the prediction operations have not been performed before the cancellation, points given for correct answers , a configuration in which points are not given uniformly regardless of the presence or absence of a prediction operation, or a configuration in which points are given uniformly.

(14) Although the setting value suggestion occurrence rate is increased according to the cumulative value of the points given for correct answers, for example, it is possible to display rare images more easily or obtain rare images with a mobile terminal or the like. It may be possible to make it easier to display an image for reading to be played, or make it easier to understand the game state in which the player is staying, such as whether or not it is in the AT mode high probability state (making it easier to generate state effects for each game state, etc.). .

(15) In the continuous effect, if neither the first selection switch 87 nor the second selection switch 88 is operated, points corresponding to the carry-over counter are added to points given for correct answers in subsequent operations. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the points given for correct answers for the times when the operation was not performed are added as they are when the operation is performed the next time or later.

(16) If neither the first selection switch 87 nor the second selection switch 88 is operated in the continuous effect, points corresponding to the number of operated games are added to points given for correct answers in subsequent operations. However, depending on the number of operation games at the time of subsequent operations, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which points given for correct answers are added assuming that an operation has been performed in the number of operation games in which no operation has been performed.

(17) If neither the first selection switch 87 nor the second selection switch 88 is operated in the specified number of times (three times) of continuous performance, the carryover counter is set to 0, and the addition to the points given for correct answers is reset once. However, if the prediction operation is not performed for the specified number of times, the carry-over counter may remain at 0 until the termination condition is satisfied, regardless of the presence or absence of the prediction operation. The end condition may be turning off the power, completing a predetermined number of games, winning a bonus, ending a bonus, winning a CZ mode transition, or the like. Further, the end condition may be established when the standby period during which the game is not played or the game stop period (for example, the period during which the demo screen is displayed) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period.

(18) If a predetermined reset condition is satisfied, such as when the CZ mode transition is won before the number of consecutive times in which the prediction operation is not performed in the continuous effect reaches the specified number (3 times), the carry-over counter is set. It may be set to 0. Other reset conditions may be turning off the power, completing a predetermined number of games, winning a bonus, or ending a bonus. Further, the reset condition may be satisfied when the standby period during which no game is played or the game stop period (for example, the period during which the demo screen is displayed) is longer than or equal to a predetermined period.

(19) Although the continuous effect is generated by the auxiliary display unit 65, it may be configured to be performed by other notification means, such as by providing another display device. In this case, a configuration is also allowed in which the enemy character selection effect and the battle effect are performed in separate display units (informing means) in the continuous effect.

(20) In the continuous effect, once the prediction operation is performed, the corresponding processing is performed even if the prediction operation is performed again, except in the case where an exceptional event occurs such as winning the transition opportunity role again. However, it is also possible to specify that the prediction operation has been performed again and store the operation information. By doing so, it is possible for the gaming machine to identify the player's operation, such as a change of heart and an unintentional operation based on some kind of presentation, and the selection rate of each option can be determined based on the identified information. It is possible to provide feedback such as performing performance adjustment such as.

(21) In the continuous effect, once the prediction operation is performed, the corresponding processing is performed even if the prediction operation is performed again, except in the case where an exceptional event occurs such as winning the transition opportunity role again. However, the configuration may be such that the prediction operation can be performed again. In this case, the points given for correct answers based on the second prediction operation may be the same points as the normal points, or may be less than the normal points.

(22) In a configuration in which points are subtracted from the correct answer points according to each option or cut-in effect in the continuous effect, if an option with a high degree of prediction difficulty or a cut-in effect occurs, the correct answer points will be deducted. may be configured to increase the number of subtractions of .

(23) In the continuous effect with the advantageous result notification, the transition to the CZ mode occurs after the result notification, but in all or part of the continuous effect with the advantageous result notification, the CZ mode is set during the continuous effect A configuration in which transition to (advantageous section) may occur may be adopted. In this case, if the prediction operation is not performed at the time when the transition to the CZ mode occurs, even if the subsequent prediction operation is before the advantageous result notification, points may not be given for correct answers. If the prediction operation is not performed at the time when the display of the eighth display segment N8 as the section display is started, points given for correct answers are not given even if the subsequent prediction operation is before the notification of the advantageous result. good too.

(24) When a prediction operation is performed in a continuous performance, and the prediction operation is correct, if the continuous performance is a continuous performance with a non-advantageous result notification, the continuous performance can be terminated. In the configuration, the continuous effect may be terminated even when the continuous effect is a continuous effect in which an advantageous result is notified. In this case, the CZ mode winning notification itself may be performed at the end of the continuous effect, and if the transition to the CZ mode occurs after the game that will be the final game if the continuous effect continues. good.

(25) In the case of winning the re-transition trigger role during the continuous performance, the number of points given for correct answers is increased so as to be advantageous for the player, but the selection rate of each option in the continuous performance A configuration may be adopted in which the prediction difficulty level of the continuous effect differs (becomes easier) by being different from the state before winning the transition opportunity combination.

(26) In the case of winning the transition trigger role again during the continuous performance, the number of points given for the correct answer increases. A configuration in which the predictable period is long may be adopted. In this case, the length of the period to be extended may differ according to the type of the winning transitional combination and the type of the transitional combination that triggered the continuous performance being executed.

(27) In the case where the second transition opportunity role is won during the continuous performance, the number of points given for correct answer is increased. . In this case, the number of correctly assigned points to be added may be different depending on the type of the winning transitional combination and the type of the transitional combination that triggered the continuous performance during execution.

(28) In the continuous effect, the initial points given for the correct answer are set to 10 points, but the initial points may be different depending on the type of transition trigger role that triggered the continuous effect. For example, the initial points may be small for strong cherries that are easy to predict that an advantageous result will be reported, and the initial points will be large for weak cherries that are difficult to predict that an advantageous result will be reported. In this case, it is difficult to predict that an unfavorable result will be announced in the continuous effect based on the strong cherry winning, and it is easy to predict that the unfavorable result will be reported in the continuous effect based on the weak cherry winning. , according to the type of prediction operation (prediction of which result will be reported), points to be given for correct answer may be set by subtracting from each initial point.

(29) Depending on the type of transition opportunity, it may be possible to configure whether or not the continuous performance is generated differently, and depending on the type of transition opportunity, predictive operations (prediction games) are possible in the generated continuous performance. It may be configured whether or not it is different, and it may be configured such that whether or not the predictive operation (predictive game) is possible in the generated continuous effect is determined by another lottery or the like.

(30) Although it is configured to predict whether it will be an advantageous result notification or a non-advantageous result notification, for example, in the continuous effect of the advantageous result notification, either the advantageous result notification or the advantageous result notification is selected. A premium effect may be set as described above.

(31) Information on the number of times prediction operations have been performed, the number of predicted correct answers, etc. may be stored, and the information may be output to a predetermined external device. The predetermined external device is, for example, a hall computer of a game hall, etc. By doing so, information on the number of times prediction operations have been performed, the number of predicted correct answers, etc. can be managed by the hall computer. The information can be used for development of game machines and the like.

(32) Although the adjustment of each option in the continuous effect is configured to be performed based on the fact that the number of prediction operations reaches the specified number as the effect adjustment condition, the effect adjustment condition is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of occurrences of continuous effects reaches a predetermined number, the effect adjustment condition may be established. Further, the effect adjustment condition may be established when the difference between the predicted correct answer rate (number) when an advantageous result is reported and the predicted correct answer rate (number) when an unfavorable result is reported reaches a predetermined number. Further, the effect adjustment condition may be satisfied when the game time or the number of games reaches a predetermined value or more. Further, the effect adjustment condition may be established when the standby period during which no game is played or the game stop period (for example, the period during which the demo screen is displayed) is equal to or longer than a predetermined period.

(33) In the effect adjustment process, the first adjustment condition (correct answer rate of 70% or more for any result notification) and the second adjustment condition (30% or less for any result notification) for whether or not to perform adjustment Accuracy rate) is an example, and is not limited to the above. For example, the first adjustment condition and the second adjustment condition may differ depending on the number of adjustments, and the first adjustment condition and the second adjustment condition may also differ depending on the effect adjustment condition that has been established.

(34) In the effect adjustment process, the numerical value for increasing or decreasing the selection rate when the first adjustment condition or the second adjustment condition is met is not limited to the above value (5%). For example, different configurations may be used for the first adjustment condition and the second adjustment condition, or different configurations may be used depending on the difference between the first adjustment condition and the second adjustment condition.

(35) In the effect adjustment process, when the selection rate is increased or decreased when the first adjustment condition or the second adjustment condition is satisfied, it is assumed that the parameter with a large difference in the selection rate of each option is started. , and the configuration for gradually adjusting so that the difference in selectivity becomes smaller has been described, but it may also be configured to adjust so that the difference in selectivity becomes larger, starting with parameters with no or small difference in selectivity. may be configured.

(36) The ball payout rate is changed according to each setting value, and the ball payout rate is the lowest at setting 1 and the highest at setting 6. Any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the mode of increase or decrease of the . For example, the ball payout rate may be the same for some setting values, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball payout rate, and other setting values may have different ball payout rates. Alternatively, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high increase/decrease rate of paid balls, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low increase/decrease rate of paid balls. Setting 1 and 5 increase the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the number of paid balls by a predetermined amount in a long period of time. A predetermined amount of decrease can be achieved in a shorter time than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 may be configured so that the number of balls paid out hardly increases or decreases. In these cases, the payout rate of each set value may be the same.

(37) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration, and for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in stopping the reel, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the pay line is set to 1 line has been described, but the configuration is not limited to this, and the pay line may be 5 lines, for example.

(38) Although a specific example of the slot machine 10 has been shown, it may be applied to a gaming machine in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are combined. That is, the slot machine may be a game machine (a so-called ball-using reel-type game machine) provided with a ball-inserting and ball-paying function like a pachinko machine instead of the medal-inserting and medal-paying functions. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

For example, a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls may be configured to have a plurality of stages of set values that change the ball output rate, etc., and each of the above inventions may be applied to suggest these set values and as a teaching effect. good. In this case, in a pachinko machine having a high-probability state and a low-probability state in which the jackpot probability is high and low, the advantageous section in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high-probability state, In a pachinko machine having a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state in which the ball rate is high and low, each of the above inventions may be applied with the advantageous section of the slot machine 10 being the high ball entry state.

<Invention groups extracted from the above embodiments>
Characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following description, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to the above-described embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the specific configurations shown in parentheses or the like are not limited.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups are known as "types of gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, a start lever is operated while medals as game media are betted. Then, an internal lottery is carried out and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If it corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). There is still room for improvement in this regard.”

<Characteristic group A>
Feature A1. A game in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation (operation of the start lever 41) and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation (operation of the stop switches 42 to 44). machine and
Based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined decision trigger different from the result of the game, granting to execute grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first specific privilege (shift to advantageous section) to the player Determination means (function for executing the advantageous section transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is the first result corresponding to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player (advantageous section transition winning), the player is notified of the first specific privilege. While it is possible to provide a privilege, the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is a second result (advantage section transition non-winning) that does not correspond to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player. Based on this, a first specific privilege granting means (a function of executing a process for causing a transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101) that prevents the player from being granted the first specific privilege;
After executing a predetermined effect (e.g., enemy character selection effect in a continuous effect) based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, the result of the provision determination is the first result. Any one of a plurality of result effects including a first result effect (advantageous result notification) and a second result effect (non-advantageous result notification) corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the second result A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for performing a specific effect (continuous effect) that performs a result effect in a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) ,
A predetermined first specific operation (second operation of the selection switch 88) is performed, a second specific privilege (for example, set value suggestion) different from the first specific privilege is given to the player, while the specific effect execution means In a situation where the specific effect that is the second result effect is being performed, at a timing before the second result effect is performed, a second specific operation (the first selection switch 87 operation) is performed, a second specific privilege giving means (function for executing point correspondence processing by the display control device 81) that prevents the second specific privilege from being given to the player;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a player performs a predetermined start operation to start a game, and performs a predetermined end operation to end the game and provide a privilege in the game, Based on the result or a different decision trigger, there are cases where the determination of whether or not the first specific privilege is granted is made, so conventional games such as simply receiving a privilege according to the game in each game A game such as obtaining a first specific privilege is added to sex to make the game more profound. In this case, whether or not it is possible to obtain the first specific privilege is notified by a specific effect by a predetermined notification means. That is, the specific effects are a first result effect in which the first specific privilege can be obtained after the predetermined effect (corresponding to the first result), and a first result effect in which the first specific privilege cannot be obtained (corresponding to the second result). ) One of a plurality of result effects including the second result effect occurs, and the result of the grant determination is notified, so if the specific effect becomes the first result effect, the first result effect The player can clearly grasp that it is possible to obtain the specific privilege.

Here, in such a game property, while the expectation that the specific effect will be the first result effect is heightened, if it is sensed in advance that the second result effect will be performed, the specific effect There is a possibility that the interest in the performance will suddenly fade away, and the performance effect of the game performance will not be enjoyed well.

Therefore, in the above configuration, in the specific effect that is the second result effect, if the player performs the first specific operation before the second result effect is performed, the second specific privilege is given. On the other hand, when the second specific operation different from the first specific operation is performed, the second specific privilege is not granted, so in the game of obtaining the second specific privilege, the second result effect is performed. It becomes necessary to perceive it before it occurs and to perform the first specific operation. Therefore, in the game in which the second specific privilege is obtained, it is important to perceive or predict in advance that the second result effect will be performed in the specific effect.

As described above, in a game in which the first specific privilege is obtained, it is not preferable to perceive or predict that the second result effect will be produced at an early stage. It has become preferable to detect or predict the effect at an early stage, and even the specific effect of the grant determination that is the second result in which the first specific privilege cannot be obtained can preferably increase the attention of the player. It becomes possible.

In addition, the second specific privilege is not awarded only when the second result effect is obtained, but the player's operation is intervened, so that the player can feel as if he/she has won the second specific privilege by his/her own operation. It is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game to be detected and predicted to be the second result effect.

Feature A2. In a situation where the specific effect, which is the first result effect, is being performed by the specific effect executing means, the second specific privilege providing means is configured to provide the first effect at a timing before the first result effect is performed. When the specific operation is performed, the second specific privilege is not given to the player, while the specific effect executing means is performing the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, the second effect is performed. Characteristic A1 characterized in that it is possible to grant the second specific privilege to the player when the second specific operation is performed at a timing before the first result effect is performed. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, in a situation where the specific effect that is the second result effect is being performed, performing the first specific operation gives the second specific privilege, while performing the second specific operation gives the second specific privilege. In the configuration of the feature A1 in which the privilege is not given, in a situation where the specific effect that is the first result effect is performed, the second specific privilege is given when the second specific operation is performed, while the first specific operation If you do, the second specific privilege will not be granted. In other words, the second specific operation should be performed when the first result effect is predicted at the timing before the first result effect and the second result effect are performed, and the second result effect should be performed. If it is predicted that it will be, the first specific operation should be performed, and in a series of specific effects in which a result effect is performed after a predetermined effect, it is possible to realize a game in which the result effect is predicted. becomes. By doing so, the player can make their own predictions, which is completely different from the gameplay that is left to the gaming machine, such as simply obtaining a privilege according to the result of the game or obtaining the first specific privilege according to the result of grant determination. A novel game property such as obtaining a second specific privilege is realized by.

Feature A3. As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in a first specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, and the first predetermined effect rather than the first predetermined effect. A second predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) that is difficult to execute in a specific effect is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in a second specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the second result effect, and in the second specific effect, the first predetermined effect The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2, wherein the second predetermined effect is easier to execute than the effect.

According to the above configuration, depending on whether the predetermined effect is the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect, the specific effect becomes the first result effect or the specific effect becomes the second result effect. If it is the first predetermined effect, it is likely to be the first result effect, and if it is the second predetermined effect, it is likely to be the second result effect. Therefore, a player who wants to obtain the first specific privilege expects the first predetermined effect, but may become less interested in the specific effect if the second predetermined effect occurs. In that respect, as described above, since the player who wants to obtain the second specific privilege wants to perceive or predict that the second result effect will be performed, the decrease in the degree of attention based on the second predetermined effect is expected. This can be avoided, and conversely, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the second predetermined effect.

Feature A4. As the predetermined effects with different execution timings in the specific effects, an earlier predetermined effect (for example, enemy character selection effect) and a later predetermined effect (for example, use weapon selection effect) to be executed at a later timing are set. and
As the first predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first predetermined effect. A predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second predetermined effect is higher than the first predetermined effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
As the post-predetermined effect, a first post-predetermined effect (for example, a machine gun as a weapon used) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second post-predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first post-predetermined effect. A predetermined production (for example, a hammer as a weapon used) is set after
The first post-predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second post-predetermined effect is performed more than the first post-predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature A3, characterized in that it has a configuration in which the effect is more likely to be executed.

According to the above configuration, the first predetermined effect and the post-predetermined effect having different execution timings are set, and the first pre-determined effect and the first post-predetermined effect that are likely to be executed in the specific effect that is the first result effect are set. In addition, a second predetermined effect and a second post-predetermined effect, which are likely to be executed in a specific effect as a second result effect, are set. By doing so, it is possible to generate an opportunity to predict the result effect by the predetermined effect shown in feature A3 at least twice, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect, and for example, In the post-predetermined performance, it is also possible to predict the result performance in consideration of the relationship with the pre-predetermined performance executed earlier, and the game to be predicted is made more profound and interesting. Increased.

Feature A5. The second specific privilege providing means can provide the second specific privilege that can be more advantageous to the player as the timing at which the first specific operation or the second specific operation is performed is earlier in the specific effect. , or the gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, characterized in that it is configured to facilitate provision of the second specific privilege.

According to the above configuration, the degree of advantage of the given second specific privilege and the ease of giving the second specific privilege differ depending on the execution timing of the first specific operation and the second specific operation, and the earlier the execution timing, the more advantageous. It becomes easy to be granted. In other words, it would be advantageous if it was possible to predict or sense that the second result effect would occur earlier. By doing so, the enjoyment of the prediction game is increased, and through this, it is possible to dramatically increase the degree of attention to the specific effect, which is the second result effect.

Feature A6. An operation specifying means (a function of executing an operation corresponding process by the display control device 81) capable of specifying that one of the first specifying operation and the second specifying operation has been performed is provided,
The second specific privilege giving means is configured to be able to give the second specific privilege based on the specific operation specified by the operation specifying means,
When the operation identifying means identifies that one of the first specific operation and the second specific operation is performed in one of the specific effects, thereafter, in the one of the specific effects, the second The game according to any one of features A1 to A5, characterized in that the operation is not specified or the operation is invalidated regardless of whether the first specified operation or the second specified operation is performed. machine.

According to the above configuration, in one specific effect, there is only one chance to perform the first specific operation or the second specific operation. By doing so, in predicting the second result performance, more careful prediction is encouraged, the interest of the prediction game is enhanced, and through this, the specific performance becomes the second result performance. It is possible to suitably increase the degree of attention to.

Further, when the above configuration is applied to the feature A5, the specific operation is prompted at an early stage, but the specific operation cannot be redone, making it possible to provide an even stronger feeling of excitement at the time of the specific operation.

Feature A7. In a situation where the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means, the operation specifying means performs the first specific operation and the second specific operation based on the grant determination by the grant determining means. Re-specification to enable specification of which of the first specific operation and the second specific operation is performed again in the specific effect even if one of them is specified to be performed. The gaming machine according to feature A6, characterized by comprising means (a function of executing reselection processing by the display control device 81).

In the above configuration, assuming a configuration in which the specific operation during the specific effect is performed only once as in the feature A6, exceptionally, when the grant determination is performed again, the specific operation is performed again. allow. By doing so, if the content is different from what was already predicted by the re-granting determination, the chance to obtain the second specific privilege is granted, matching the player's change of heart and the progress of the game. It can be playability.

Feature A8. When it is possible to specify the operation again by the re-specifying means, the second specified privilege based on the already specified operation is better than the second specified privilege when the operation is specified again. The gaming machine according to feature A7, characterized in that it has a configuration that is likely to be advantageous to the player or that the second specific privilege is likely to be granted.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature A7, it is more advantageous for the player to maintain the previous operation (not to perform the operation again) than to perform the operation again. A second specific privilege is granted, or the second specific privilege is easily granted. In other words, even if a second chance of prediction is obtained, it is advantageous to maintain the previous prediction. It is possible to secure the superiority of

Feature A9. In a situation where the specific effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means, the grant determination is made by the grant determination means, and the operation has not been specified by the operation specifying means until then. , the re-specifying means can specify the operation again than when the operation is specified by the operation specifying means after the grant determination, and the re-specifying operation is specified. The gaming machine according to feature A7 or feature A8, characterized in that the second specific privilege that is likely to be advantageous to the player is awarded or the second specific privilege is likely to be awarded.

According to the above configuration, when the grant determination is performed again during the specific effect and the prediction operation becomes possible again, the prediction operation is not performed before the grant determination is performed again, After that, the second specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given or the second specific privilege is more likely to be given when the prediction operation is performed again than when the prediction operation is performed. In other words, even if a chance for re-prediction is obtained, if no prediction has been made before that, re-prediction is more advantageous. The advantage of making predictions before a decision can be made is secured and early predictions are encouraged.

Feature A10. The second specific privilege granting means is
When the first specific operation is performed at a timing before the first result effect is performed in a situation where the specific effect as the first result effect is performed by the specific effect execution means, the game While the second specific privilege is not given to the person, in a situation where the specific effect as the first result effect is being performed by the specific effect executing means, before the first result effect is performed When the second specific operation is performed at the timing of, it is possible to grant the second specific privilege to the player,
In a situation where the specific effect is being performed by the specific effect executing means, either the first result effect or the second result effect is performed without performing either the first specific operation or the second specific operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the second specific privilege is not granted when (1) is executed.

According to the above configuration, when the first result effect or the second result effect is performed while neither the first specific operation nor the second specific operation is performed in a situation where the specific effect is being performed. is not given the second special privilege. By doing so, in the game for obtaining the second specific privilege, either operation of the first specific operation or the second specific operation becomes essential, and by prompting the specific operation, interest in the game can be made. becomes possible.

Feature A11. In a situation where the specific effect is being performed by the specific effect executing means, either the first result effect or the second result effect is performed without performing either the first specific operation or the second specific operation. If the above is executed, the second specified privilege is not granted, and the privilege corresponding to the second specified privilege that has not been granted is granted in the specified performance after the next time. Characteristic A10 characterized by comprising a third specific privilege granting means (a function of executing a process of adding correct answer points based on the carry-over counter by the display control device 81) that can be granted to game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the result effect is executed without performing any of the first specific operation and the second specific operation, the privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege is carried over to the next time and thereafter. By doing so, if the specific performance is difficult to understand which result will be produced, such a difficult prediction is avoided and the user waits until the easy-to-understand specific performance while carrying over the second specific privilege. is also possible. As a result, the playability of the prediction game is enhanced, and it becomes possible to select a specific effect for predicting from a plurality of times of specific effects, thereby increasing attention over a longer period of time.

Feature A12. The third specific privilege providing means can provide a privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege as the specific performance from the next time onward until the specific performance is performed for a predetermined specific number of times (three times). The gaming machine according to feature A11, characterized in that

According to the above configuration, the number of times the privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege is carried over is limited. By doing so, the prediction operation is encouraged to be performed at least once in the specific number of times, which is the limited number of times, and it is possible to favorably perform such a game.

Feature A13. The grant determination means determines the grant based on the result of the game being a first trigger result (eg, strong cherry) or a second trigger result (eg, weak cherry) different from the first trigger result. is executable and
When the grant determination is performed based on the first trigger result, the first result is more likely to be obtained than when the grant determination is performed based on the second trigger result,
A case where the specific effect is performed by the specific effect executing means based on the grant determination triggered by the first trigger result, and the specific effect based on the grant determination triggered by the second trigger result The degree of advantage of the second specific privilege that can be imparted by the second specific privilege imparting means differs, or the ease with which the second specific privilege is imparted differs between when the specific effect is performed by the executing means and when the specific effect is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, characterized by:

In the above configuration, the first trigger result and the second trigger result are provided as the result that triggers the grant determination when the specific effect is performed, and it depends on which trigger result the specific effect is performed. , the degree of advantage of the second specific privilege is different, or the ease with which the second specific privilege is granted is different. The probability of the first result is different between the grant determination triggered by the first trigger result and the grant determination triggered by the second trigger result. The prediction difficulty may differ depending on whether the specific effect is based on the result or the specific effect is based on the second opportunity result. Therefore, in the above configuration, by setting the advantage of the second specific privilege or the like according to the difference in the prediction difficulty, the prediction difficulty is low even though the prediction difficulty is high. It is possible to solve the absurdity that a privilege similar to the privilege when the correct answer is given is given in some cases.

Feature A14. The specific effect can be executed over a plurality of games,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein a game in which the predetermined effect is performed and a game in which the result effect is performed by the specific effect executing means can be different.

According to the above configuration, by predicting that the second result effect will be performed in the specific effect performed over the plurality of games, the degree of attention of the plurality of games until the result effect is performed is preferably increased. can be enhanced. Therefore, it is possible to maintain a state in which the degree of attention of each game is relatively high.

Feature A15. The second specific privilege granting means is characterized in that it is possible to grant the second specific privilege after the specific performance that triggered the granting of the second specific privilege is performed. The game machine according to any one of A1 to A14.

According to the above configuration, in the specific effect, the effect of whether or not the first specific privilege is given is performed, and during the period when such a specific effect is being performed, even the second specific privilege is displayed. Granting is restricted, and the timing at which the first specific privilege is granted and the timing at which the second specific privilege is granted are less likely to clash. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately increase the degree of attention to the game at the timing of granting each specific privilege.

Feature A16. When the first specific operation is performed at a timing before the second result effect is performed in a situation where the specific effect that is the second result effect is performed by the specific effect execution means, Ending means for ending the specific effect without performing the second result effect in the specific effect (when an operation that becomes a predicted correct answer is performed in the continuous effect that informs the non-advantageous result by the display control device 81, the A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, characterized in that it has a function of executing processing for clearing effect flags and pseudo flags.

According to the above configuration, when the first specific operation for granting the second specific privilege is performed in a situation where the specific performance in which the first specific privilege is not granted is performed, the specific performance continues until the result performance. Exit without doing anything. By doing so, the player's disappointing feeling of being shown a disappointing performance to the end despite predicting/perceiving that the result of the specific performance is the result of not giving the first specific privilege. can be eliminated.

Feature A17. In a situation where the specific effect, which is the first result effect, is being performed by the specific effect executing means, the second specific privilege providing means is configured to provide the first effect at a timing before the first result effect is performed. When the specific operation is performed, the second specific privilege is not given to the player, while the specific effect executing means is performing the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, the second effect is performed. When the second specific operation is performed at a timing before the first result effect is performed, it is possible to provide the player with the second specific privilege,
The terminating means, in a situation where the specific effect that is the first result effect is being performed by the specific effect executing means, at a timing before the first result effect is performed, the second specific operation is performed. The gaming machine according to feature A16, characterized in that, when performed, the specific effect is executed until the first result effect is performed in the specific effect.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration of feature A16, the performance that pleases the player is performed to the end without ending even if the player is predicting/detecting the result. By doing so, it is possible to sufficiently enjoy the specific effect, and it is possible to solve the problem that the specific operation makes it impossible to see the happy effect.

<Characteristic group B>
Feature B1. A gaming machine in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation,
Grant determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant the first specific benefit to the player based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined determination trigger different from the result of the game A function to execute an advantageous section transition lottery by) and
Based on the fact that the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is the first result corresponding to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player (advantageous section transition winning), the player is notified of the first specific privilege. While it is possible to provide a privilege, the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is a second result (advantage section transition non-winning) that does not correspond to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player. Based on this, a first specific privilege providing means (a function of executing a process for causing a transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101) that does not give the first specific privilege to the player;
After executing a predetermined effect (e.g., enemy character selection effect in a continuous effect) based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, the result of the provision determination is the first result. Any one of a plurality of result effects including a first result effect (advantageous result notification) and a second result effect (non-advantageous result notification) corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the second result A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for performing a specific effect (continuous effect) that performs a result effect in a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) ,
with
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in a first specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, and the first predetermined effect rather than the first predetermined effect. A second predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) that is difficult to execute in a specific effect is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in a second specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the second result effect, and in the second specific effect, the first predetermined effect The second predetermined effect is easier to execute than the effect,
When the first predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, a predetermined specific operation (operation of the first selection switch 87) is performed before the result effect in the specific effect is executed. When the performed first specific event occurs, a second specific privilege different from the first specific privilege can be given to the player, and the second predetermined performance is executed by the specific performance executing means. In the case, when a second specific event in which the specific operation (operation of the first selection switch 87) is performed occurs before the result effect in the specific effect is executed, the second specific privilege is played A second specific privilege granting means (function for executing point correspondence processing by the display control device 81) that can be granted to a person is provided,
The second specific privilege providing means provides the second specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player when the second specific event occurs than when the first specific event occurs, or It is easier to give the second specific privilege (for example, in a continuous production with an advantageous result notification, it is more advantageous in a situation where a tank is selected than in a situation where a zombie is selected and an advantageous result is predicted. A gaming machine characterized in that more points are given when a correct answer is given when a result is predicted.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a player performs a predetermined start operation to start a game, and performs a predetermined end operation to end the game and provide a privilege in the game, Based on the result or a different decision trigger, there are cases where the determination of whether or not the first specific privilege is granted is made, so conventional games such as simply receiving a privilege according to the game in each game A game such as obtaining a first specific privilege is added to sex to make the game more profound.

In this case, whether or not it is possible to obtain the first specific privilege is notified by a specific effect by a predetermined notification means. That is, the specific effects are a first result effect in which the first specific privilege can be obtained after the predetermined effect (corresponding to the first result), and a first result effect in which the first specific privilege cannot be obtained (corresponding to the second result). ) One of a plurality of result effects including the second result effect occurs, and the result of the grant determination is notified, so if the specific effect becomes the first result effect, the first result effect The player can clearly understand that it is possible to obtain the specific privilege, and that the first specific privilege cannot be obtained if the second result effect occurs. While the first result effect and the second result effect are performed via the predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are set as the predetermined effect, and the first predetermined effect is performed. In this case, after that, the first result effect is likely to occur, and conversely, when the second predetermined effect is performed, the second result effect is likely to occur thereafter.

Here, in such a game property, while the expectation that the specific effect will be the first result effect is heightened, if it is sensed in advance that the second result effect will be performed, the specific effect There is a possibility that the interest in the performance will suddenly fade away, and the performance effect of the game performance will not be enjoyed well. In that respect, as described above, in a configuration in which it is possible to predict to some extent which result will be produced by the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect that precedes the first result effect or the second result effect, the predetermined effect is performed, more specifically, when the second predetermined effect is performed, it is detected in advance that the second result effect will be performed, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the specific effect is greatly reduced. There is

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the first predetermined effect is performed and when the second predetermined effect is performed, on the condition that the specific operation is performed before the result effect is performed, The configuration is such that the second specific privilege is imparted, and the second specific privilege tends to be more advantageous when the second specified performance is performed than when the first specified performance is performed, or the second specific privilege is provided. Even in a situation where the expectation for the first special privilege is low, the expectation for the second special privilege will reduce the attention It is possible to compensate.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is not only necessary that the second predetermined effect is performed, but in the situation where the second predetermined effect is performed, the specific operation by the player is performed before the result notification is performed. Since it was made to intervene, it can be made to feel that the 2nd special privilege was won by own operation. Therefore, for example, instead of obtaining the first specific privilege, it is also possible to make the user think that he or she has chosen to obtain the second specific privilege, and it is possible to more preferably follow up on the fact that the first specific privilege is not granted. can be done.

In addition, even if the second predetermined effect is performed, the desire for the first result effect is not completely cut off, so by doing so, the second predetermined effect is performed and the first result effect is performed. is performed, it is also possible to congratulate the granting of the first specific privilege via a performance that rarely occurs by granting the second specific privilege. Therefore, it is possible to preferably improve the interest of the game.

Feature B2. The second specific privilege providing means is configured such that when the second predetermined effect is executed at a first timing in the specific effect, the second predetermined effect is faster than the specific effect when the second specific event occurs. Giving the second specific benefit that is more advantageous to the player when the second specific event occurs in the case of execution at the second timing prior to the first timing in , or It is easier to give the second specific privilege (when the prediction operation is performed when the tank is selected in the enemy character selection effect, the prediction operation is performed when the hammer is selected in the weapon selection effect) The gaming machine according to feature B1, wherein the number of points awarded for correct answers is greater than in the case of a correct answer.

When the second predetermined effect occurs at an early timing, it is considered that the player predicts that the specific effect will become the second result effect at an early stage, and in that case, the interest in the specific effect increases. It may fade prematurely. In that regard, in the above configuration, the earlier the second predetermined effect is performed, the more advantageous the second specific privilege is granted, triggered by the second specific event. Conversely, the player who desires the privilege expects the occurrence of the second predetermined effect at an early stage, and it is possible to preferably increase or maintain the expectation for the game effect.

Feature B3. As the predetermined effects with different execution timings in the specific effects, an earlier predetermined effect (for example, enemy character selection effect) and a later predetermined effect (for example, use weapon selection effect) to be executed at a later timing are set. and
As the first predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first predetermined effect. A predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second predetermined effect is higher than the first predetermined effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
As the post-predetermined effect, a first post-predetermined effect (for example, a machine gun as a weapon used) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second post-predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first post-predetermined effect. A predetermined production (for example, a hammer as a weapon used) is set after
The first post-predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second post-predetermined effect is performed more than the first post-predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2, characterized in that the effect is more likely to be executed.

In the case of the above configuration, since it is assumed that there are a pre-specified effect and a post-predetermined effect as the specified effects, the sense of anticipation decreases depending on which of the specified effects is used to perceive that the second result effect will be achieved. different timing. That is, for example, if the first predetermined effect has occurred in the previous predetermined effect, it is unlikely that the expectation at that point will decrease, and if the second predetermined effect has occurred in the previous predetermined effect, that point expectations are greatly reduced. In such a configuration, if the sense of anticipation has already fallen before reaching the post-predetermined performance, even if the first post-predetermined performance is performed in the post-predetermined performance, it is difficult to expect a significant recovery of the sense of anticipation. Conceivable. Under such a configuration, when the second predetermined effect (the second predetermined effect or the second post-predetermined effect) is performed, the first predetermined effect (the first pre-determined effect or the first post-predetermined effect) is performed. If the second specific privilege, which is more advantageous than when it is performed, can be granted, etc., it is possible to appropriately compensate for the sense of expectation according to the timing when the sense of expectation declines.

Feature B4. The second specific privilege granting means, when the second predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect executing means, the second specific effect is performed by the specific effect executing means in the case where the second specific event occurs. When the predetermined effect is executed, the second specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player is given than when the second specific event occurs, or it is easier to give the second specific privilege (enemy character selection effect If the prediction operation is performed when the tank is selected in , more points are given when the correct answer is given than when the prediction operation is performed when the hammer is selected in the weapon selection production. The gaming machine according to feature B3.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the premature decline of the sense of expectation by performing the second predetermined effect instead of the first predetermined effect as the first predetermined effect on the front side. Become.

Feature B5. The second specific privilege granting means performs the second predetermined effect by the specific effect executing means, and the second specific event occurs when the second post-prescribed effect is executed. , when the first predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect execution means and the second post-predetermined effect is executed, the second effect is more advantageous to the player than when the second specific event occurs. 2 It is easier to give the specific privilege or to give the second specific privilege (when the tank is selected and then the prediction operation is performed when the hammer is selected, the zombie is selected and then The gaming machine according to feature B3 or feature B4, wherein more points are given for a correct answer when an advantageous result is reported than when a predictive operation is performed at the time the hammer is selected.

According to the above configuration, the combination of the second predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect makes the compensation by the second specific privilege thicker than the combination of the first pre-determined effect and the second post-predetermined effect. As a result, the second specific privilege can appropriately follow the decrease in expectations when the second predetermined effect is performed in both the first predetermined effect and the post-predetermined effect.

Feature B6. The second specific privilege granting means executes the second predetermined effect and performs the second predetermined effect and the The case where the second specific event occurs before execution of the second post-predetermined effect is better than the case where the second pre-determined effect is executed and the second specific event occurs after the execution of the second post-predetermined effect. Rather, it is easier to give the second specific privilege that is advantageous to the player, or to give the second specific privilege (when the tank is selected, the prediction operation is performed, and then the hammer is selected) More points are given when the correct answer is given when the tank is selected and then when the predictive operation is performed when the hammer is selected. The gaming machine according to any one of B5.

According to the above configuration, even when the second predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are performed in the same manner, the degree of advantage of the second specific privilege, etc. differs depending on the timing at which the specific operation is performed. The case where the specific operation is performed before the second post-predetermined effect is performed (when the second specific event occurs) is better than the case where the specific operation is performed after the second post-predetermined effect is performed. , the second specific privilege becomes advantageous, or the second specific privilege becomes easier to be granted. In this way, by varying the second specific privilege according to the operation timing of the player, it is possible to increase the importance of the operation by the player and encourage active participation in the game, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. .

Feature B7. When the second predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect executing means and the second post-predetermined effect is executed, the second specific privilege granting means executes the second predetermined effect. and when the second specific event occurs before the execution of the second post-predetermined effect, and then when the second specific event occurs after the execution of the second post-predetermined effect, and when the second post-predetermined effect occurs. If the second specific privilege does not occur after the Characteristic B6, characterized in that, when the prediction operation is performed at the time of selection, and then the hammer is selected, even if the prediction operation is performed again when the hammer is selected, the points given for correct answers are the same). game machine.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the second predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect are performed, once the specific operation is performed, even if the specific operation is performed again thereafter, the second specific privilege , etc. do not change. By doing so, the importance of the operation timing of the specific operation becomes more conspicuous, and the player's interest in the game in which he/she participates naturally increases.

Feature B8. If the second specific privilege providing means does not cause the second specific event when the second predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect executing means and the second post-predetermined effect is executed, The gaming machine according to feature B6 or feature B7, wherein the second specific privilege is not provided.

The above configuration further clarifies the fact that the second specific privilege is granted on the condition that the specific operation is performed. By doing so, the importance of the specific operation is further enhanced.

Feature B9. Based on the predetermined operation performed by the player in accordance with the predetermined operation instruction effect, the operation corresponding effect execution means (executing the processing for performing the cut-in effect by the display control device 81) capable of executing the operation corresponding effect function),
As the operation corresponding effects, a first operation corresponding effect (strong cut-in effect) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second operation corresponding effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first operation corresponding effect. (weak cut-in effect) and is set,
The first operation-corresponding effect and the second operation-corresponding effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second operation-corresponding effect is higher than the first operation-corresponding effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
The second specific privilege granting means provides the operation response when the first specific event or the second specific event occurs when the second operation-responsive effect is executed by the operation-responsive effect execution means. Giving the second specific privilege that is more advantageous to the player than when the first specific event or the second specific event occurs when the first operation corresponding effect is executed by the effect executing means, Or the features B1 to B8 characterized in that the second specific privilege is easily given (more points are given for correct answers when a weak cut-in effect occurs than when a strong cut-in effect occurs). 1. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

According to the above configuration, even if a specific event occurs in the same way, the advantage of the second specific privilege, etc., is determined by the operation response effect that occurs when the player performs a predetermined operation in response to the operation instruction effect. can differ. More specifically, when the second operation-corresponding effect is performed, which tends to result in the second result effect, the second specific privilege advantageous to the player is more likely to be given than when the first operation-corresponding effect is performed. Become. In this way, not only the specific operation but also the predetermined operation in which the interaction with the game machine occurs can affect the second specific privilege, so that the amusement of the game of obtaining the second specific privilege is favorably enhanced. becomes possible.

Feature B10. As the predetermined effects with different execution timings in the specific effects, an earlier predetermined effect (for example, enemy character selection effect) and a later predetermined effect (for example, use weapon selection effect) to be executed at a later timing are set. and
As the first predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first predetermined effect. A predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second predetermined effect is higher than the first predetermined effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
As the post-predetermined effect, a first post-predetermined effect (for example, a machine gun as a weapon used) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second post-predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first post-predetermined effect. A predetermined production (for example, a hammer as a weapon used) is set after
The first post-predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second post-predetermined effect is performed more than the first post-predetermined effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
When the second predetermined effect is executed and the second post-predetermined effect is executed by the specific effect execution means, the second specific privilege granting means performs the second post-predetermined effect after the second post-predetermined effect is executed. When the second operation corresponding performance is executed before the second post-predetermined performance is executed, and then the second specific event occurs before the second post-predetermined performance is executed, rather than when the specific event occurs. It is easier to give the second specific privilege that is advantageous to the player, or to give the second specific privilege (in the case where the tank is selected and the hammer is selected, after the hammer is selected The game machine according to feature B9, wherein more points are given when a correct answer is given when a tank is selected and a prediction operation is performed when a weak cut-in occurs than when a prediction operation is performed.

In the case of the above configuration, since it is assumed that there are a pre-specified effect and a post-predetermined effect as the specified effects, the sense of anticipation decreases depending on which of the specified effects is used to perceive that the second result effect will be achieved. different timing. That is, for example, if the first predetermined effect has occurred in the previous predetermined effect, it is unlikely that the expectation at that point will decrease, and if the second predetermined effect has occurred in the previous predetermined effect, that point expectations are greatly reduced. In such a configuration, if the sense of anticipation has already fallen before reaching the post-predetermined performance, even if the first post-predetermined performance is performed in the post-predetermined performance, it is difficult to expect a significant recovery of the sense of anticipation. Conceivable. Under such a configuration, when the second predetermined effect (the second predetermined effect or the second post-predetermined effect) is performed, the first predetermined effect (the first pre-determined effect or the first post-predetermined effect) is performed. If the second specific privilege, which is more advantageous than when it is performed, can be granted, etc., it is possible to appropriately compensate for the sense of expectation according to the timing when the sense of expectation declines.

Moreover, in such a configuration, when the second predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect are performed as a set, the second post-predetermined effect is faster than the case where the specific operation is performed after the second post-predetermined effect. When the second operation corresponding performance is performed as the operation corresponding performance before and the specific operation is performed at that time, a more advantageous second specific privilege can be given. That is, the specific operation is performed after seeing the second predetermined effect and the second operation corresponding effect rather than the case where the specific operation is performed after seeing the second predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect. A more advantageous second specific privilege can be given if the

Here, the second operation corresponding effect is generated under the condition of a predetermined operation by the player, and depending on the operation, not only the second operation corresponding effect but also the first operation corresponding effect can be generated. Then, in the operation-response effect, basically, it can be considered that the predetermined operation is performed with a sense of anticipation for the first operation-response effect to be performed. In this case, it is conceivable that the sense of expectation for the awarding of the first specific benefit can be greatly reduced compared to the second predetermined effect that is unilaterally performed on the gaming machine side. Therefore, in the above configuration, by compensating for such a drop in expectations with the second specific privilege, it is possible to suitably avoid a drop in interest in the game presentation.

Feature B11. The second specific privilege granting means executes the operation-responsive effect in a case where the operation-responsive effect is not executed by the operation-responsive effect executing means without the predetermined operation being performed based on the operation instruction effect. The second specific privilege that is advantageous to the player is granted or it is easier to grant the second specific privilege than when the first operation corresponding production is executed by means (rather than not generating a cut-in production) The game machine according to feature B9 or feature B10, wherein the point subtraction due to the occurrence of the strong cut-in effect results in a smaller number of points given for a correct answer.

According to the above configuration, the second specific privilege, which is more advantageous when none of the operation-corresponding effects are generated than when the first operation-corresponding effect is generated, can be provided. That is, when an action such as generating either the first operation-corresponding effect or the second operation-corresponding effect is performed via the predetermined operation, even if the advantage of the second specific privilege is lowered, Since the user is sufficiently enjoying the specific performance, it is considered that the decrease in the sense of expectation for the performance is small. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the second specific privilege from being given unnecessarily and increase the rarity of the second specific privilege.

Feature B12. The second specific privilege granting means, when the specific effect that is the first result effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means, and when the first predetermined effect is executed, the first When the one specific event occurs before the result effect is executed, the second specific privilege can be given to the player, and the first result effect is achieved by the specific effect executing means. When the specific effect is executed and the second predetermined effect is executed, if the two specific events occur before the first result effect is executed, the second The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11, wherein a specific privilege can be given to the player.

According to the above configuration, the rarity in the case where the first specific privilege is granted through the second predetermined effect can be blessed by the provision of the second specific privilege. By doing so, even when the second predetermined effect, in which the provision of the first specific privilege cannot be expected, occurs, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the sense of expectation for the specific effect.

Feature B13. The second specific privilege granting means, when the specific effect that is the second result effect is being executed by the specific effect executing means and when the first predetermined effect is executed, the first When the one specific event occurs before the result effect is executed, the second specific privilege can be given to the player, and the second result effect is achieved by the specific effect executing means. When the specific effect is executed and the second predetermined effect is executed, if the two specific events occur before the first result effect is executed, the second The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B12, wherein a specific privilege can be given to the player.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to compensate for the lack of the first specific privilege with the second specific privilege. Therefore, even when the second predetermined effect, in which the provision of the first specific privilege cannot be expected, occurs, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the sense of expectation for the specific effect.

<Characteristic group C>
Feature C1. A gaming machine in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation,
Grant determination means (main controller 101) for determining whether or not to grant the first specific benefit to the player based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined determination trigger different from the result of the game A function to execute an advantageous section transition lottery by) and
Based on the fact that the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is the first result corresponding to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player (advantageous section transition winning), the player is notified of the first specific privilege. While it is possible to provide a privilege, the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is a second result (advantage section transition non-winning) that does not correspond to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player. Based on this, a first specific privilege granting means (a function of executing a process for causing a transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101) that prevents the player from being granted the first specific privilege;
After executing a predetermined effect (e.g., enemy character selection effect in a continuous effect) based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, the result of the provision determination is the first result. Any one of a plurality of result effects including a first result effect (advantageous result notification) and a second result effect (non-advantageous result notification) corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the second result A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for performing a specific effect (continuous effect) that performs a result effect in a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) ,
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in a first specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, and the first predetermined effect rather than the first predetermined effect. A second predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) that is difficult to execute in a specific effect is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in a second specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the second result effect, and in the second specific effect, the first predetermined effect The second predetermined effect is easier to execute than the effect,
A predetermined specific operation in a specific situation when the second predetermined effect in the specific effect is executed by the specific effect execution means and before the result effect of the specific effect is executed. When (operation of the second selection switch 88) is performed, while giving the player a second specific privilege different from the first specific privilege, in the specific situation, if the specific operation is not performed, the A gaming machine characterized by comprising a second specific privilege granting means (a function of executing a point handling process by a display control device 81) for not granting a second specific privilege.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a player performs a predetermined start operation to start a game, and performs a predetermined end operation to end the game and provide a privilege in the game, Based on the result or a different decision trigger, there are cases where the determination of whether or not the first specific privilege is granted is made, so conventional games such as simply receiving a privilege according to the game in each game A game such as obtaining a first specific privilege is added to sex to make the game more profound.

In this case, whether or not it is possible to obtain the first specific privilege is notified by a specific effect by a predetermined notification means. That is, the specific effects are a first result effect in which the first specific privilege can be obtained after the predetermined effect (corresponding to the first result), and a first result effect in which the first specific privilege cannot be obtained (corresponding to the second result). ) One of a plurality of result effects including the second result effect occurs, and the result of the grant determination is notified, so if the specific effect becomes the first result effect, the first result effect The player can clearly understand that it is possible to obtain the specific privilege, and that the first specific privilege cannot be obtained if the second result effect occurs. While the first result effect and the second result effect are performed via the predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are set as the predetermined effect, and the first predetermined effect is performed. In this case, after that, the first result effect is likely to occur, and conversely, when the second predetermined effect is performed, the second result effect is likely to occur thereafter.

Here, in such a game property, while the expectation that the specific effect will be the first result effect is heightened, if it is sensed in advance that the second result effect will be performed, the specific effect There is a possibility that the interest in the performance will suddenly fade away, and the performance effect of the game performance will not be enjoyed well. In that respect, as described above, in a configuration in which it is possible to predict to some extent which result will be produced by the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect that precedes the first result effect or the second result effect, the predetermined effect is performed, more specifically, when the second predetermined effect is performed, it is detected in advance that the second result effect will be performed, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the specific effect is greatly reduced. There is

Therefore, in the above configuration, when the second predetermined effect is performed, the second specific privilege is given on the condition that the specific operation is performed before the result effect is performed. , it becomes possible to compensate for the decrease in the degree of attention with the feeling of anticipation for the provision of the second specific privilege.

Moreover, in the above configuration, it is not only necessary that the second predetermined effect is performed, but in the situation where the second predetermined effect is performed, the specific operation by the player is performed before the result notification is performed. Since it was made to intervene, it can be made to feel that the 2nd special privilege was won by own operation. Therefore, for example, instead of obtaining the first specific privilege, it is also possible to make the user think that he or she has chosen to obtain the second specific privilege, and it is possible to more preferably follow up on the fact that the first specific privilege is not granted. can be done.

In addition, even if the second predetermined effect is performed, the desire for the first result effect is not completely cut off, so by doing so, the second predetermined effect is performed and the first result effect is performed. is performed, it is also possible to congratulate the granting of the first specific privilege via a performance that rarely occurs by granting the second specific privilege. Therefore, it is possible to suitably improve the interest of the game.

Feature C2. After the specific operation is performed in the specific situation, if a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the specific effect (a result notification matching the predicted operation is generated), the second specific privilege granting means Characteristic C1 characterized in that, while granting a 2 specific benefit, the second specific benefit is not provided if the specific condition is not satisfied in the specific performance after the specific operation is performed in the specific situation. The gaming machine described in .

According to the above configuration, in order to obtain the second specific privilege in the specific effect, it is not only necessary to perform the specific operation in the specific situation before the second predetermined effect is performed and before the result effect is performed. After that, it becomes necessary to satisfy a specific condition in the specific effect. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the specific effect from decreasing after the specific operation, and to enjoy the specific effect to the end.

Feature C3. The specific condition can be satisfied when the specific operation is performed in the specific situation, but if the specific operation is not performed in the specific situation, regardless of the content of the specific effect The gaming machine according to feature C2, characterized in that it is not established.

According to the above configuration, the specific operation is superior in terms of the specific operation and the specific condition involved in granting the second specific privilege, and the specific operation must be performed in order to satisfy the specific condition. By doing so, in the second predetermined performance where it is difficult to expect to obtain the first specific privilege, an opportunity to obtain another second specific privilege is provided through the player's operation. can be suitably realized.

Feature C4. The specific operation when the specific condition is satisfied after the specific situation and the specific operation when the specific condition is not satisfied after the specific situation are the same operation. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

According to the above configuration, it is further clarified that the success or failure of the specific condition differs by the same specific operation. By clarifying in this way, there is no complication that the success or failure of the specific condition differs depending on the way of the player's specific operation, and the specific effect is purely displayed as to whether the specific condition is satisfied after that. can entertain.

Feature C5. When the specific operation is not performed in a predetermined specific effect, the second specific privilege providing means performs the specific operation in another specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means after the predetermined specific effect. What is the second specific privilege granted based on the fact that the specific operation is performed in the predetermined specific effect and the specific operation is performed in the other specific effect based on the fact that , the second specific privilege with different advantages for the player can be granted, or the ease of granting the second specific privilege can be different, according to any one of features C1 to C4 game machine.

According to the above configuration, when the specific operation is not performed in the predetermined specific effect, the second specific privilege is not given in the predetermined specific effect, but another specific effect is executed after the predetermined specific effect. The degree of advantage of the second specific privilege given when the specific operation is performed in , and the ease with which the second specific privilege is given may differ depending on whether or not the specific operation is performed in a predetermined specific effect. In this way, by allowing the presence or absence of the specific operation to affect across the specific effects, it is possible to increase the attention of the entire game over a plurality of specific effects, and for example, if the specific operation is not performed In this case, if the configuration is such that it is advantageous when the specific operation is performed in another specific effect, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game at least until the other specific effect occurs.

Feature C6. The second specific privilege providing means corresponds to the second specific privilege provided when the specific operation is not performed in a predetermined specific effect and when the specific operation is performed in the predetermined specific effect. The corresponding benefit (additional number of points given for correct answers according to the carry-over counter) is given when the specific operation is performed in another specific effect executed by the specific effect executing means after the predetermined specific effect. The gaming machine according to feature C5, characterized in that it is possible to provide the second specific benefit together with the second specific benefit based on the above.

According to the above configuration, the second specific privilege when the specific operation is not performed is carried over as the corresponding privilege. By doing so, for example, when the player misses the second predetermined effect, or conversely, when he/she misses the opportunity to perform the specific operation because he/she concentrates too much on the specific effect, the player can be rescued. .

Feature C7. The feature C6, wherein the second specific privilege granting means can grant the corresponding privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege until the specific performance is performed for a predetermined specific number of times (three times). The game machine described.

According to the above configuration, the number of times the corresponding privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege is carried over is limited. By doing so, the player is prompted to perform the specific operation at least once in the specific number of times, which is the limited number of times, and it is possible to favorably perform the game.

Feature C8. The second specific privilege giving means gives a privilege that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second specific privilege as a corresponding privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege, or makes it difficult to give the second specific privilege. The gaming machine according to feature C6 or feature C7, characterized by:

According to the above configuration, when the second specific privilege is carried over without performing the specific operation, it is carried over as a privilege that is more disadvantageous than usual. By doing so, it becomes possible to increase the superiority of performing the specific operation normally (without carrying over), and it is possible to prompt the specific operation in the specific situation in each specific effect.

Feature C9. When the second specific privilege granting means grants a corresponding privilege corresponding to the second specific privilege, it is preferable that the specific operation is performed at the first timing in the specific situation of the specific effect. A feature characterized in that a privilege more advantageous to the player than when the specific operation is performed at a second timing after the first timing is given, or the second specific privilege is easier to give. The game machine according to any one of C6 to C8.

According to the above configuration, when the second specific privilege is carried over, it is advantageous to perform the specific operation at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the second predetermined effect will occur soon, and the amusement is improved.

Feature C10. In the situation where the specific effect is performed, if the grant determination is performed again, the specific operation is not performed in the specific situation before the grant determination is performed in the specific effect. The configuration is such that the player is more advantageous when the specific operation is performed in the specific situation before the grant determination is performed in the specific effect, rather than when the game is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C9.

According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the specific effect is performed based on the grant determination, if the grant determination is performed again during the specific effect, if the specific operation is performed before the re-grant determination , you can receive more advantageous treatment than if you did not perform the specific operation. By doing so, it is possible to urge the specific operation and make it difficult to cause an event in which the prepared second specific privilege is not granted (the game is not executed by the specific operation).

Feature C11. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein the first specific privilege granting means grants the first specific privilege regardless of the presence or absence of the specific operation.

According to the above configuration, it is more clarified that the second specific privilege is a privilege that is independent of the first specific privilege. By doing so, it is possible to increase the significance of providing the second specific privilege.

<Characteristic group D>
Feature D1. A game in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation (operation of the start lever 41) and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation (operation of the stop switches 42 to 44). machine and
Based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined decision trigger different from the result of the game, granting to execute grant determination as to whether or not to grant the first specific privilege (shift to advantageous section) to the player Judgment means (function for executing the advantageous section transition lottery by the main controller 101);
Based on the fact that the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is the first result corresponding to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player (advantageous section transition winning), the player is notified of the first specific privilege. While it is possible to provide a privilege, the result of the provision determination by the provision determination means is a second result (advantage section transition non-winning) that does not correspond to the provision of the first specific privilege to the player. Based on this, a first specific privilege granting means (a function of executing a process for causing a transition to an advantageous section by the main control device 101) that prevents the player from being granted the first specific privilege;
After executing a predetermined effect (e.g., enemy character selection effect in a continuous effect) based on the provision determination by the provision determination means, the result of the provision determination is the first result. Any one of a plurality of result effects including a first result effect (advantageous result notification) and a second result effect (non-advantageous result notification) corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the second result A specific effect execution means (a function of executing a continuous effect setting process by the display control device 81) for performing a specific effect (continuous effect) that performs a result effect in a predetermined effect means (auxiliary display unit 65) ,
with
As the predetermined effects, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in a first specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the first result effect, and the first predetermined effect rather than the first predetermined effect. A second predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) that is difficult to execute in a specific effect is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in a second specific effect that is the specific effect that becomes the second result effect, and in the second specific effect, the first predetermined effect The second predetermined effect is easier to execute than the effect,
A first specific operation (first 1 selection switch 87) and a second specific operation (second selection switch 88) for determining that the result effect is the second result effect (second selection switch 88). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a function of executing corresponding processing.

According to the above configuration, in a gaming machine in which a player performs a predetermined start operation to start a game, and performs a predetermined end operation to end the game and provide a privilege in the game, Based on the result or a different decision trigger, there are cases where the determination of whether or not the first specific privilege is granted is made, so conventional games such as simply receiving a privilege according to the game in each game A game such as obtaining a first specific privilege is added to sex to make the game more profound.

In this case, whether or not it is possible to obtain the first specific privilege is notified by a specific effect by a predetermined notification means. That is, the specific effects are a first result effect in which the first specific privilege can be obtained after the predetermined effect (corresponding to the first result), and a first result effect in which the first specific privilege cannot be obtained (corresponding to the second result). ) One of a plurality of result effects including the second result effect occurs, and the result of the grant determination is notified, so if the specific effect becomes the first result effect, the first result effect The player can clearly understand that it is possible to obtain the specific privilege, and that the first specific privilege cannot be obtained if the second result effect occurs. While the first result effect and the second result effect are performed via the predetermined effect, the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect are set as the predetermined effect, and the first predetermined effect is performed. In this case, after that, the first result effect is likely to occur, and conversely, when the second predetermined effect is performed, the second result effect is likely to occur thereafter.

Here, in such a game property, while the expectation that the specific effect will be the first result effect is heightened, if it is sensed in advance that the second result effect will be performed, the specific effect There is a possibility that the interest in the performance will suddenly fade away, and the performance effect of the game performance will not be enjoyed well. In that respect, as described above, in a configuration in which it is possible to predict to some extent which result will be produced by the first predetermined effect or the second predetermined effect that precedes the first result effect or the second result effect, the predetermined effect is performed, more specifically, when the second predetermined effect is performed, it is detected in advance that the second result effect will be performed, and there is a possibility that the degree of attention to the specific effect is greatly reduced. There is

Therefore, in the above configuration, before the result effect is performed in the specific effect, the first specific operation that the result effect is the first result effect, and the result effect is the second result effect. By enabling the second specific operation to be performed by the player, the game machine predicts or perceives whether the first result effect or the second result effect has been performed by the player. It can be grasped from the side. By doing so, for example, it is possible to realize a game feature such as giving a different privilege to the player based on the result of the prediction or detection. It is also possible to grasp the accuracy of the prediction and detection on the game machine side and feed it back to specific effects and later game machine design. Therefore, it is possible to suitably exhibit the performance effect of the specific performance.

Feature D2. a first storage means (first operated flag, first selection counter) capable of storing that the first specific operation has been performed;
a second storage means (second operated flag, second selection counter) capable of storing that the second specific operation has been performed;
The gaming machine according to feature D1, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to facilitate the management of the content of the player's predictions and perceptions on the gaming machine side, and based on the predictions and perceptions, some kind of privilege is given or fed back. When performing processing, it is possible to perform the processing at a timing later than the timing at which the prediction or detection was performed.

Feature D3. The occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect when the first result effect is performed is such that the first predetermined effect is 1.5 times or more the second predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2, characterized by being set.

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the first result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, in the specific effect as the first result effect, as a prediction of the first result effect The accuracy with which the first specific operation is performed increases, and the probability that the second specific operation is not performed as a prediction of the second result effect increases. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player with peace of mind that the specific effect is the first result effect.

Feature D4. The rate of occurrence of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect when the first result effect is performed is set so that the first predetermined effect is twice or less than the second predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature D3, characterized in that

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the first result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, the effect of the characteristic D3 can be expected more preferably. In particular, by setting the upper limit of the rate of occurrence of the first predetermined performance as described above, it is possible to prevent the specific performance of the first result performance from becoming too easy to understand and optimize the performance balance.

Feature D5. The occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect when the second result effect is performed is set so that the second predetermined effect is twice or less than the first predetermined effect. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the second result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, in the specific effect that becomes the second result effect, as a prediction that it is the second result effect The accuracy with which the second specific operation is performed decreases, that is, the probability of performing the first specific operation as a prediction of the first result effect increases. By doing so, even if the specific effect is the second result effect, the player can be entertained while expecting that the specific effect may be the first result effect.

Feature D6. The occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect when the second result effect is performed is such that the second predetermined effect is 1.5 times or more the first predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to feature D5, characterized by being set.

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in the second result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, the effect of the characteristic D5 can be expected more preferably. In particular, by setting the upper limit of the rate of occurrence of the second predetermined effect as described above, it is possible to prevent the fact that the specific effect, which is the second result effect, from becoming too obscure, and optimize the effect balance. .

Feature D7. The occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect when the first result effect is performed is set to be twice or more the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect when the second result effect is performed. The game machine according to any one of features D1 to D6, characterized in that

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect that is likely to be selected in the specific effect that is the first result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, the expectation that the first result effect will be obtained when the first predetermined effect occurs. and a sense of security can be suitably provided.

Feature D8. The occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect when the first result effect is performed is 2.5 times or less the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect when the second result effect is performed. The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the game machine is set to:

By setting the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect that is likely to be selected in the specific effect that is the first result effect at the ratio of the above configuration, the effect of the feature D7 can be expected more favorably. In particular, the upper limit of the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect during the specific effect that is the first result effect and the lower limit of the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect during the specific effect that is the second result effect are set as described above. Thus, it is possible to prevent the fact that the specific effect, which is the first result effect based on the first predetermined effect, from becoming too difficult to understand, and to optimize the effect balance.

Feature D9. As the predetermined effects with different execution timings in the specific effects, an earlier predetermined effect (for example, enemy character selection effect) and a later predetermined effect (for example, use weapon selection effect) to be executed at a later timing are set. and
As the first predetermined effect, a first predetermined effect (for example, a zombie as an enemy character) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first predetermined effect. A predetermined effect (for example, a tank as an enemy character) is set,
The first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second predetermined effect is higher than the first predetermined effect. The production is a structure that is easier to execute,
As the post-predetermined effect, a first post-predetermined effect (for example, a machine gun as a weapon used) that can be executed in the first specific effect, and a second post-predetermined effect that is less likely to be executed in the first specific effect than the first post-predetermined effect. A predetermined production (for example, a hammer as a weapon used) is set after
The first post-predetermined effect and the second post-predetermined effect can be executed in the second specific effect, and in the second specific effect, the second post-predetermined effect is performed more than the first post-predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein the game machine has a structure in which the effect is more likely to be executed.

In the case of the above configuration, it is assumed that there are a pre-determined effect and a post-predetermined effect as the pre-determined effect, so there are a plurality of timings at which it is possible to predict and perceive the result effect, and these pre-determined effects and pre-determined effects are provided. Prediction and detection of result effects are also possible by combination with post-predetermined effects. It is also possible to provide feedback to game machine design.

Feature D10. a first storage means (first operated flag, first selection counter) capable of storing that the first specific operation has been performed;
a second storage means (second operated flag, second selection counter) capable of storing that the second specific operation has been performed;
Changing means (effect adjustment by display control device 81) capable of changing the rate of occurrence of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect using at least one of the first storage means and the second storage means function to perform processing) and
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D9, characterized by comprising:

According to the above configuration, it is possible to change the rate of occurrence of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect based on the player's prediction or sensing operation. If something is too obvious or too obscure, the rate of occurrence can be adjusted. By doing so, the balance between the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect can be matched with the sense of the player, and the effect of the specific effect can be exhibited favorably.

Feature D11. The gaming machine according to feature D10, wherein the changing means changes the occurrence rate under one condition that a predetermined operation (a selection operation reaching a specified number) has been performed.

According to the above configuration, the change in the rate of occurrence of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect in feature D10 is also performed by the player's operation. By doing so, compared with the configuration in which the change of the occurrence rate of the first predetermined effect and the second predetermined effect is automatically performed on the gaming machine side, compared with the configuration in which the change is automatically performed on the gaming machine side. As a result, the production is made transparent.

It is also possible to individually apply the technical ideas shown in each configuration of the other feature groups A to D to each configuration of the feature group A to feature group D detailed above. However, it is also possible to combine and apply each technical idea. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine across a group of features.

The basic configuration of a game machine to which each feature described above can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko machine: an operating means operated by a player, a game ball shooting means for shooting a game ball based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage for guiding the shot game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game This game machine is provided with game parts arranged in an area, and gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a predetermined passing part of the game parts.

Spindle-type game machine such as slot machine: Equipped with variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a final stop after variably displaying the symbol row; A special game that is advantageous to the player under the condition that the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping or after the lapse of a predetermined time, and that the final stopped symbol at the time of stopping is a specific symbol. A gaming machine designed to generate a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with a variable display means for displaying a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then finally stopping the symbol row; A special game state (bonus game, etc.), and further comprising: a throwing device for performing throwing processing for taking in game balls from the ball tray provided with a ball tray; and a payout device for putting out game balls to the ball tray. A gaming machine constructed so that the operation of the starting operating means is enabled when a game ball is thrown in.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10... Slot machine as a game machine, 32... Reel as a revolving body, 41... Start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... Stop switch as a stop operation means, 64... Speaker constituting an auxiliary effect part, 65 ... Auxiliary display section constituting an auxiliary effect section, 68 ... Instruction monitor, N8 ... Eighth display segment as a section display device, 81 ... Display control device as a sub control board, 101 ... Main control device as a main control board , 102 .

Claims (1)

A gaming machine in which one game is started based on a predetermined start operation and a privilege is given according to the result of the one game based on a predetermined end operation,
grant determination means for determining whether or not to grant the first specific benefit to the player based on the result of the game or based on a predetermined determination trigger different from the result of the game;
The first specific privilege may be granted to the player based on the fact that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is a first result corresponding to granting the first specific privilege to the player. On the other hand, based on the fact that the grant determination result by the grant determination means is a second result that does not correspond to granting the first specific privilege to the player, the first specified privilege is given to the player. a first specific benefit granting means for not granting
After executing a predetermined effect based on the grant determination by the grant determination means, a first result effect corresponding to the result of the grant determination being the first result, and the result of the grant determination a second result effect corresponding to the second result, and a specific effect of performing any one of a plurality of result effects, including a specified effect, to be performed by a predetermined effect means. a means of execution;
In a situation where the specific effect is performed by the specific effect execution means and before the result effect in the specific effect is performed, a predetermined first specific operation and a second specific operation different from the first specific operation are performed. an operation receiving means capable of receiving an operation of a specific operation;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images